Jf 


GEOGRAPHY 


D.C. HEATH  BcCG, 


B  O  3  T  O 


Vv* 


OF   THE 

WOKLD 

SHOWING 

UNITED  STATES 

AND  ITS  POSSESSIONS 


United  States  FouesuonB  in  Bed 

Scale  of  Hllai  on  the  Equator 


Bait  from     160     Greenwich    180 


120     Longitude 


PHILIPPINE 


GEOGRAPHY    PRIMER 


BY 

PRESCOTT   F.   JERNEGAN,  A.B. 

PHILIPPINE    NORMAL    SCHOOL,    MANILA 


BOSTON,   U.S.A. 

D.    C.    HEATH   &   CO.,   PUBLISHERS 
1906 


COPYRIGHT,  1906, 
BY  D.  C.  HEATH  &  CO. 


All  rights  reserved. 
EDUCATION  DCFff 


EDUC. 
LIBRARY 


PREFACE 

THE  Philippine  Geography  Primer  is  intended  for  use  in  the 
third  grade.  It  includes  as  much  material  as  the  average  class 
may  be  expected  to  cover.  After  deducting  holidays  and  time 
spent  in  reviews,  examinations,  and  exercises  in  modeling  and  map 
drawing,  sufficient  time  will  remain  for  one  hundred  and  fifty  les- 
sons, each  including  about  one  hundred  and  sixty  words  of  the 
text ;  this  will  complete  the  book  within  the  year. 

In  plan,  the  book  adheres  to  the  principle  that  the  study  of 
geography  should  begin  with  facts  observable  at  home,  and  relating 
to  the  physical  features  and  changes  of  the  surface  of  the  earth. 
To  this  subject,  Part  I,  about  one  tenth  of  the  work  is  devoted. 

The  main  facts  about  the  earth  as  a  whole  are  then  presented, 
as  an  indispensable  requisite  for  the  study  of  the  political  and  com- 
mercial geography  of  even  so  restricted  an  area  as  the  Philippines. 
Thus,  near  the  beginning  of  their  study,  the  pupils  learn  in  a  general 

way  the  place  of  their  country  in  relation  to  the  great  world, its 

zones,  races,  and  the  broad  activities  of  its  peoples.  This  subject, 
Part  II,  occupies  about  one  eighth  of  the  Primer. 

A  somewhat  detailed  study  of  the  Philippines  constitutes  Part 
III,  covering  about  one  third  of  the  book.  The  chief-  ends  sought 
are :  first,  to  convey  an  idea  of  the  volume  and  value  of  the  natural 
resources  of  the  Philippines,  and  the  inadequate  development  of 
these  resources,  as  well  as  of  the  peoples  of  the  country ;  secondly, 
to  point  out  how  and  why  such  growth  as  exists  has  been  secured. 
The  reasons  for  the  locations  and  prosperity  of  the  larger  towns, 
and  for  the  superiority  in  products .  of  one  section  over  the 
others,  are  indicated.  Thirdly,  to  show  in  what  directions  and  bv 

fL  /\  H  ff  A  O  «/ 


iv  PREFACE 

what  means  the  resources  of  the  land  and  the  people  may  be  more 
fully  utilized. 

Part  IV  includes  rather  more  than  one  third  of  the  book,  and 
attempts  to  give  those  facts  about  the  continents  and  countries  of 
the  world  that  are  an  indispensable  part  of  even  a  primary  educa- 
tion. The  method  of  presentation  agrees  in  general  with  that  fol- 
lowed in  case  of  the  Philippines,  with  the  addition  of  comparisons 
and  correlations  of  these  countries  with  the  Philippines. 

Asia,  and  the  countries  of  Asia  nearest  the  Philippines,  receive 
the  first  place  for  obvious  reasons ;  Europe  the  next,  as  the  source 
of  the  civilization  of  the  Philippines  and  the  physical  complement 
of  Asia,  then  America  as  following  Europe  historically  both  in  its 
own  development  and  in  its  relation  to  the  Philippines.  The  re- 
maining continents  receive  only  the  modicum  of  attention  that  the 
limits  of  a  primer  permit. 


SUGGESTIONS   TO   FILIPINO   TEACHERS 


IN  teaching  Part  I,  show  the  pupils, 
if  possible,  the  forms  of  land  and  water. 
Take  them  out  doors.  Have  them  ex- 
amine the  soil  and  find  the  sand  and 
decayed  vegetation.  Show  them  the 
stones  in  the  bed  of  a  dry  stream. 
Show  them  how  the  stones  have  broken 
one  another  into  sand.  If  you  live  near 
the  coast,  show  the  pupils  the  beach, 
the  action  of  the  waves  and  tides,  a 
cape,  a  harbor,  etc.  There  are  little 
hills  and  valleys  near  every  school. 
Show  the  pupils  how  the  little  streams 
have  dug  small  valleys  and  left  hills 
between  the  valleys.  Make  them  see 
what  they  read  about  in  the  book. 

Have  the  pupils  draw  a  map  of  the 
school  room,  of  the  school  grounds,  and 
of  the  town.  Have  th.em  find  out  some 
distance  in  the  town  that  is  ^kilometer, 
another  that  is  a  mile.  Have  them 
walk  this  distance  and  see  how  many 
minutes  it  takes.  Have  them  find  a 
tract  of  land  that  is  just  one  hectare, 
and  another  that  is  just  one  acre. 

In  teaching  Part  II,  use  the  globe 
with  every  lesson.  Have  each  of  the 
pupils  point  out  the  equator,  the  poles, 
the  zones,  the  oceans,  the  continents. 
Show  them  the  motions  of  the  earth 
with  the  globe.  In  teaching  indus- 
tries, have  them  bring  to  school  sam- 
ples of  the  different  things  that  are 


manufactured  in  the  town.  Have  them 
find  out  themselves  what  things  are 
exported  from  the  town  and  imported 
into  it,  and  the  prices  at  which  these 
things  are  sold  and  bought. 

In  teaching  Part  III,  the  Philip- 
pines, make  models  of  the  different 
islands  in  sand.  The  relief  map  on 
page  29,  as  well  as  the  colored  maps 
on  pages  26,  27,  41,  and  57,  will  prove 
helpful  in  this  part  of  the  work.  Have 
the  pupils  draw  from  the  map  and  from 
memory  every  island  said  province  they 
study.  Teach  them  to  bound  each 
province  and  to  tell  what  island  is 
nearest  north,  east,  south,  and  west  of 
your  island.  Have  them  bring  to 
school  specimens  of  the  plants,  metals, 
and  minerals  found  in  or  near  your 
town.  If  possible,  get  specimens  of 
their  products  from  other  provinces, 
and  show  them  to  the  class. 

If  any  of  the  pupils  have  lived  in 
other  towns  of  the  province  or  other 
provinces,  have  them  tell  the  class 
about  those  towns  and  provinces. 

In  teaching  Part  IV,  show  the  pupils 
pictures  from  larger  geographies  and 
other  books.  Study  each  picture  in  the 
Primer.  Have  the  pupils  tell  you 
everything  the  picture  teaches  about  geog- 
raphy. In  preparing  each  lesson,  find 


VI 


SUGGESTIONS   TO   FILIPINO   TEACHERS 


out  what  any  map  and  any  picture  in 
the  book  can  teach  you  about  that 
lesson. 

Besides  the  questions  in  the  "Helps," 
ask  others  that  you  think  will  help  the 
pupils  to  understand  the  lesson.  Ask 
the  questions  in  different  ivords  from 
those  of  the  book,  after  you  have  used  the 
book  questions.  Do  not  let  the  children 
recite  like  parrots.  Make  them  think. 

Wherever  the  book  says  "  because," 
or  "therefore,"  or  "reason,"  be  sure 
that  you  find  out  the  reason  and  learn 
how  to  explain  it.  Make  the  children 


understand  it  so  that  they  can  tell  it 
in  different  words  from  those  of  the 
book. 

Always  ask  yourself  and  the  chil- 
dren of  what  use  the  knowledge  gained 
in  a  lesson  is.  Ask  how  it  may  help 
them  to  become  good  farmers  and  ivork- 
men  and  citizens.  Ask  whether  other 
towns,  provinces,  and  countries  are 
better  in  any  way  than  yours,  and  if 
they  are  better,  why  they  are  better 
and  how  you  may  improve  your  town, 
province,  and  country.  TJiis  is  why  we 
study  geography. 


CONTENTS 

PART   I 
THE  LAND,   THE   WATER,   AND   THE   AIR 

PAGE 

I.     The  Soil .  1 

II.     Hills  and  Mountains .2 

III.  Valleys      .                                   3 

IV.  Rivers 4 

V.     Ponds  and  Lakes 6 

VI.     The  Ocean 6 

VII.     The  Rain 8 

VIII.     The  Air 9 

IX.     Maps                                                                               ......  9 

PART    II 
THE   EARTH  AS   A   WHOLE 

I.     Shape  and  Size  of  the  Earth 12 

II.     Motions  of  the  Earth        .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .  •  .         .13 

III.  The  Zones 15 

IV.  The  Continents  and  Oceans 18 

V.     The  Great  Races  of  Mankind 20 

VI.     Industry  and  Commerce  ...........  22 

VII.     Government 23 

PART   III 
THE  PHILIPPINE  ISLANDS 

I.     THE  PHILIPPINES  AS  A  WHOLE 25 

1.  Climate  and  Products 28 

2.  Animals,  Metals,  and  Minerals        ........  34 

3.  Government     ............  38 

II.     DESCRIPTION  OF  THE  ISLANDS  AND  PROVINCES 39 

1.  The  Luzon  Group 39 

2.  The  Visayan  Group 55 

3.  The  Mindanao  Group 62 

PART   IV 
THE   CONTINENTS  AND  COUNTRIES  OF   THE   WORLD 

I.    ASIA 67 

1.  Asia  as  a  Whole 67 

2.  Countries  of  Asia 71 

II.     EUROPE 79 

1.  Europe  as  a  Whole          ..........  79 

2.  Countries  of  Europe 82 

III.  NORTH  AMERICA 94 

1.  North  America  as  a  Whole 94 

2.  Countries  of  North  America  .........  98 

IV.  SOUTH  AMERICA      ............  113 

1.  South  America  as  a  Whole 113 

2.  Countries  of  South  America 114 

V.     AFRICA     . 119 

1.  Africa  as  a  Whole 119 

2.  Countries  of  Africa 120 

VI.     AUSTRALIA  AND  THE  PACIFIC  ISLANDS        .        .        .        .        .        .        .125 

APPENDIX                                        . 128 


PHILIPPINE   GEOGRAPHY  PRIMER 


PART   I 


THE   LAND,   THE   WATER,   AND   THE   AIR 


against  one  another  and  break 
the  rocks.  The  waves  of  the 
sea  break  the  rocks  on  the  shore. 


I.   The  Soil 

We  live  on  the  land.  The 
land  is  made  of  soil  and  rocks. 
The  soil  is  soft ;  the  rocks  are  hard. 
Most  of  the  surface  of  the  land 
is  soil,  and  under  the  soil  there 
is  solid  rock. 

Rub  some  dry  soil  between 
your  fingers.  Some  of  the  little 
pieces  in  the  soil  are  hard  and 
sharp.  They  are  pieces  broken 
from  the  solid  rock.  Some  of 

them  are  large  and  SOme  of  them  The  waves  break  the  rocks  and  make  sand 

You  may  see  much  sand  by  the 
rivers  and  on  the  seashore.  This 
sand  is  made  from  the  rocks 
which  the  water  has  broken. 

Soil  is  also  made  by  the  de- 
caying of  the  rocks.  The  air 
and  the  rain  make  the  rock  fall 
into  little  pieces,  and  in  this  way 

The  rocks  decay  and  make  soil  SO11  1S  formed. 

are  small,  but  in  good  soil  most  ^ll  sf  «•  made  from  ™?°- 

of    the    pieces    are   very    small.  ne  ™cks  **?*>  f  a[e   l)roken 

These  little  pieces  of  rock  we  call  mto/™  Partwles  ^  the  streams 

sand.  and  waves- 

How   are   rocks    broken    into  There  are  little  dark  pieces  in 

little  pieces  ?     Rivers  roll   rocks  some    soils.      These    pieces    are 

1 


2 


PHILIPPINE   GEOGKAPHY  PRIMER 


soft.      They   are   not   hard   and  that  rises  slowly;    a  steep  slope 

sharp,     like     sand.      They    are  rises  quickly, 
pieces  of   decayed  leaves,  grass,         The  top  of  a  mountain  is  called 

or  wood,  and  they  make  the  soil  the  summit.     A  sharp  summit  is 

fertile.     Plants  grow  well  in  fer-  called  a  peak.    When  a  mountain 


Point  out  hills,  mountain  range,  slopes,  summit,  peak, 
and  river 


tile  soil. 

Nearly  all 
animals  get 
their  food 
from  plants, 
and  most 
plants  get 
food  from 
the  soil. 
Without  soil 
there  would 
be  very  lit- 
tle food. 
Soil  is  very 
useful. 

Without  soil,  few  plants,  ani- 
mals, or  men  could  live. 

Helps.  —  Get  some  soil.  Find  sand 
and  little  rocks  in  it.  Find  decayed 
plants  in  it.  Of  what  two  things  is 
the  land  made?  With  what  is  most 
of  the  surface  of  the  land  covered? 
What  is  under  the  soil?  From  what 
is  soil  made  ?  In  what  two  ways  is  soil 
made  from  rocks?  What  do  plants 
get  from  soil  ?  Why  is  soil  useful  ? 

Spell.  —  Soil,  decayed,  fertile,  useful. 

II.  Hills  and  Mountains 
High  places  in  the  land  are 
called  hills.  Very  high  hills  are 
called  mountains.  The  sides  of 
hills  and  mountains  are  called 
slopes.  A  gentle  slope  is  one 


or  hill  is  very  long  in  one  direction, 
it  is  called 
a  ridge.  A 
long,  high 
ridge  with 
several  peaks, 
is  called  a 
mountain 
range. 

Most 
mountains 
are  made  of 
rock.  There 
is  little  soil  on 
mountains. 
Mountains  are  parts  of  the 
solid  rock  that  have  been  pushed 
up  from  under  the  surface  of  the 
earth.  Some  hills,  also,  were 
made  in  this  way. 

Volcanoes.  —  Some  mountains 
have  holes  in  them  out  of  which 
are  thrown  hot  water,  stones, 
ashes,  and  lava.1  Such  moun- 
tains are  called  volcanoes.2  The 
hole  in  a  volcano  is  called  a  crater? 

1  Lava  is  rock  melted  by  great  heat  under 
the  surface  of  the  earth.     When  the   lava 
is  thrown  into  the  air  by  the  volcano,  it  is 
scattered  and  hardens  in  little  pieces  called 
cinders. 

2  See  picture  of  a  volcano  on  page  53. 
8  See  picture  of  a  crater  on  page  52. 


THE  LAND,  THE  WATER,  AND  THE  AIR 


There  are  many  volcanoes  in 
the  Philippine  Islands,  and  some- 
times they  destroy  houses  and 
people. 

Uses  of  Mountains.  --  Many 
mountains  are  covered  with  for- 
ests. From  the  forests  men  cut 
trees,  and  from  the  trees  they 
get  lumber.  With  the  lumber 
they  build  houses  and  ships. 

The  mountain  streams  give 
water  for  the  fields.  The 
streams  turn  the  wheels  of 
mills. 

From  the  mountains  come  gold, 
silver,  iron,  and  other  useful 
metals,  and  by  and  by  we  shall 
learn  that  the  mountains  help  to 
make  the  rain  fall  on  the  land. 

Mountains  give  us  lumber, 
streams  of  water,  and  metals, 
and  cause  rain. 

Helps.  — What  is  a  hill?  Where 
have  you  seen  a  hill  ?  What  is  a  moun- 
tain ?  Where  have  you  seen  a  moun- 
tain ?  How  far  from  your  town  is  the 
nearest  mountain  ?  What  is  a  slope  ? 
A  gentle  slope  ?  A  steep  slope  ?  Tell 
where  there  is  a  gentle  slope  and  a 
steep  slope  near  your  town.  What  is  a 
summit  ?  A  peak  ?  A  ridge  ?  A  moun- 
tain range  ?  Of  what  are  mountains 
made  ?  Of  what  are  many  hills  made  ? 
Why  is  fine  soil  found  in  the  lowlands  ? 
What  is  a  volcano  ?  Lava  ?  A  crater  ? 
Name  four  uses  of  mountains. 

Spell.  —  Mountain,  slope,  peak, 
range,  volcano. 


III.   Valleys 

The  low  land  between  two 
hills  or  mountains  is  called  a 
valley.  Some  valleys  are  very 
narrow,  and  some  are  so  wide 
that  you  cannot  see  across  them. 

How  Valleys  are  Made.  -  -  The 

smallest  stream  of  water  is  called 
a  rill.     When  other  rills  join  it. 


range 


The  rills  cut  little  channels  in  the  land 

the  stream  becomes  a  brook. 
The  brook  is  larger  and  stronger 
than  a  rill.  The  brook  carries 
along  soil  and  many  small  stones. 
The  water  and  the  stones  cut  a 
channel  in  the  land.  This  chan- 
nel grows  wider  and  deeper. 
The  rain  washes  soil  into  the 
brook,  and  the  brook  carries. the 
soil  away.  In  this  way  most 
valleys  were  made. 

Some  valleys  were  made  by  the 
rising  or  sinking  of  the  land. 
When  mountain  ranges  are 
pushed  up  from  under  the  sur- 
face of  the  earth,  the  low  land 
between  them  is  called  a  valley. 
Many  great  valleys  were  made  in 
this  way. 


PHILIPPINE   GEOGRAPHY   PKIMER 


Most  valleys  were  cut  out  of  the 
land  l)y  streams  of  water.  Some 
large  valleys  are  formed  by  the 
rising  of  mountain  ranges. 

Uses  of  Valleys.  —  Most  of  the 
fertile  land  is  in  the  valleys. 
Most  valleys  have  rivers  in  them. 
People  can  travel  and  trade  easily 
by  going  along  the  rivers,  so 
many  people  live  in  the  valleys. 


river.  The  place  where  the  river 
begins  is  called  its  source.  The 
place  where  the  river  flows  into 
another  body  of  water  is  called 
its  mouth.  Very  swift  parts  of 
the  river  are  called  rapids,  and 
where  the  river  falls  over  a  wall 
of  rock  a  waterfall  is  formed. 


A  fertile  river  valley 

Most  of  the  people  live  in  the 
valleys  because  most  of  the  fertile 
land  is  in  the  valleys. 

Helps.  —  What  is  a  valley  ?  Is 
there  a  valley  near  the  schoolhouse? 
Where  have  you  seen  a  large  valley  ? 
What  is  a  rill  ?  A  brook  ?  A  chan- 
nel ?  How  are  most  valleys  made  ? 
How  are  some  large  valleys  made  ? 
Are  there  more  people  in  the  valleys 
or  in  the  mountains?  Give  two  rea- 
sons for  your  answer. 

Spell.— Valley,  fertile,  travel,  rea- 
sons. 


Waterfall  and  rapids 

Is  a  river  higher  at  its  source 
or  at  its  month  ? 

When  rain  falls,  some  of  it 
sinks  into  the  ground.  The 
water  flows  slowly  along  under 
the  ground.  By  and  by,  on  some 
hillside  or  in  some  valley,  it  may 
come  to  the  surface  of  the  ground, 
making  a  spring.  Many  rivers 
have  their  sources  in  springs. 


Deltas.  —  All  rivers  carry  some 

A  large  stream  of  water  flow-     sand  and  fine   soil.     When   the 
ing  through  the  land  is  called  a     river  reaches  the  ocean  or  a  lake, 


THE  LAND,  THE  WATER,  AND  THE  AIR 


the  water  stops  running.  Then 
the  sand  and  the  fine  soil  fall 
to  the  bottom  of  the  sea  or  lake, 
as  sediment.  After  a 
long  time  the  sediment 
fills  the  ocean  or  lake 
near  the  mouth  of 
the  river,  and  makes 
new,  flat  land.  This 
land  is  called  a  delta. 
Deltas  are  fertile,  and 
sometimes  they  are  very  large. 
There  are  large  deltas  at  the 
mouths  of  the  Agno  and  Pain- 
pan  ga  rivers  in  Luzon. 


and  fertile  lowlands  are  formed 
on  each  side  of  the  river.  These 
lowlands  are  called  flood  plains. 


A  river  system,  river  basin,  and  delta 

Flood  Plains.  --When  a  river 
flows  over  its  banks,  there  is  a  flood. 
When  there  is  a  flood,  the  water 
runs  swiftly  and  carries  much 
sediment.  This  sediment  falls 
upon  the  land  and  builds  it  up 
higher.  After  many  floods,  great 


A  flood  in  Manila 

River  Basins  and  Systems.  — 
The  smaller  streams  that  flow 
into  a  river  are  called  its  branches. 
The  land  from  which  a  river  and 
its  branches  carry  away  the  water 
is  called  a  river  basin.  The  river 
and  its  branches  are  called  a  river 
system. 

Uses  of  Rivers.  — Boats  sail  on 
rivers ;  rivers  are,  therefore,  use- 
ful for  travel  and  trade.  The 
water  of  rivers  is  carried  to  fields 
to  help  plants  grow.  Some  rivers 
turn  the  wheels  of  mills. 

Rivers  make  deltas  and  flood 
plains.  Rivers  are  useful  for 
travel  and  trade,  and  to  give 
ivater  for  plants  and  mitts. 

Helps.  —  What  is  a  river  ?  The 
source  ?  The  mouth  ?  What  are 
rapids?  What  is  a  waterfall?  A 
spring  ?  Sediment  ?  Where  have 
you  seen  a  delta?  How  is  it  made? 
Can  you  tell  why  a  delta  is  flat  ? 

What  is  a  flood  plain  ?  Can  you 
tell  why  it  takes  a  long  time  to  make 


PHILIPPINE   GEOGRAPHY   PRIMER 


a  flood  plain  ?  What  is  a  river  branch  ? 
A  river  basin?  A  river  system? 
Name  four  uses  of  rivers. 

Spell.  —  Basin,  system,  source, 
mouth. 

V.   Ponds  and  Lakes 

A  pond  is  a  small  body  of 
water  nearly  or  quite  surrounded 
by  land.  A  very  large  pond  is 
called  a  lake.  Sometimes  a  pond 
or  lake  is  only  a  broad  place  in 
a  river,  the 
river  flow- 
ing in  at 
one  end  of 
thepondor 
lake,  and 
out  at  the 
other  end. 

Uses  of  Lakes.  —  Lakes  have 
nearly  the  same  uses  as  rivers. 
The  land  around  lakes  is  often 
fertile,  and  many  towns  are  built 
on  their  shores.  Can  you  tell 
why? 

Helps.  —  What  is  a  pond  ?  A  lake  ? 
What  are  the  uses  of  lakes  ? 

Spell.  —  Rapids,  waterfall,  delta, 
sediment. 

VI.   The  Ocean 

The  ocean  is  the  great  body  of 
water  that  covers  most  of  the 
surface  of  the  earth.  Three 
fourths  of  the  earth's  surface  is 
water ;  only  one  fourth  is  land. 

The  ocean  is  much  deeper  than 
rivers  or  lakes.  The  highest 


mountain  in  the  Philippines 
could  be  hidden  far  below  the 
surface  in  many  parts  of  the 
ocean.  The  water  of  the  ocean 
is  salty  and  it  usually  has  a  blue 
or  green  color. 

The  ocean  rises  twice  and  falls 
twice  every  twenty-five  hours. 
For  about  six  hours  the  water 
rises,  and  then  for  about  six 
hours  the  water  falls.  This 

motion  of 
the  ocean 
is  called 
the  tide. 
The  moon 
and  the 


Lake  Taal 


sun  cause 
the  tide. 

Land  Forms.  —  TJie  coast  or 
coast  line  is  the  place  where 
the  land  and  the  ocean  meet. 
When  a  point  of  land  goes  far 
out  into  the  ocean,  it  is  called  a 
cape.  If  the  cape  is  nearly  sur- 
rounded by  water,  it  is  called  a 
peninsula. 

A  small  body  of  land  sur- 
rounded by  water  is  called  an 
island.  Land  that  is  not  an  is- 
land is  called  the  mainland  or 
continent.  A  narrow  body  of 
land  that  joins  two  larger  bodies 
of  land  is  called  an  isthmus. 

Water  Forms. —  A  portion 
of  the  ocean  partly  surrounded 
by  land  is  called  a  bay  or  gulf. 


THE   LAND,   THE   WATER,   AND   THE   AIR 


A  very  large  bay  or  gulf  may  be  Men  build  lighthouses  on  capes 

called  a  sea.     If   a  bay  is  small  and  near  dangerous  reefs.     They 

and  is  nearly  surrounded  by  land,  place  large  lamps  in  them.     The 

it  is  called  a  harbor.     A  harbor  light  of  the  lamps  shines  far  over 


is  a  safe 
place  for 
ships  when 
the  wind 
blows  hard. 
A  city  built 
near  a  har- 
bor is  called 
a  port. 
Straits  and 
channels  are 
narrow  bod- 


Land  and  water  forms 


the  sea  and 
guides  the 
sailor  safely. 

The  ocean 
is  deep  and 
wide.  Many 
ships  sail  on 
it,  and  the 
rain  comes 
from  it. 
The  stars 


ies  of  water  that  connect  larger     and    the    lighthouses    guide    the 
bodies  of  water. 

Uses  of  the  Ocean. —  One  great 
use  of  the  ocean  is  as  a  waterway 


sailors. 

Helps. —  What  is  the  ocean?     How 
much  of  the  surface  of  the  earth  does  the 


for  the   thousands  of  ships  that     ocean  cover?    How  deep  is  the  ocean? 
sail  upon  it.     It  gives  us  many     what  is  the  taste  of  ocean  water? 

t/  TTTl  i  1  1_  J_1-    _  O  TTTT A. 

fish  for  food.     Winds  from  the 

ocean  cool  us,  and  in  the  next 

lesson   we    shall  learn   how  the 

rain    that    falls   upon   the    earth     land  ?     The  mainland  ?    An  isthmus  ? 

comes  from  the  ocean. 

Lighthouses. — When 
the  sailor  cannot  see  the 
land,  he  guides  his  ship 
by  the  stars;  but  the 
stars  are  sometimes  hid- 
den by  clouds,  and  in 
some  places  rocks  are  A  lighthouse  on  a  rock 
near  the  surface  of  the  ocean. 

rocks     are     called     reefs,     sula,   isthmus,    harbor, 
ships     strike     these     wrecked>  lighthouse. 

i        11 

1  Wrecked  means  broken  to  pieces. 


Such 

Sometimes 

reefs   and  are   wrecked.1 


What   color  has   the    ocean?     What 
is  the  tide  ?     What  causes  the  tide  ? 

What  is  the   coast,  or   coast  line? 
What  is  a  cape  ?    A  peninsula  ?    An  is- 

ithmus  ? 

What  is  a  bay  ?  A  gulf  ? 
A  sea?  A  harbor?  A 
port  ?  What  are  straits, 
and  channels  ?  What  are 
the  main  uses  of  the 
ocean  ?  What  in  the  ocean 
is  good  to  eat?  In  what 
two  ways  is  the  sailor 
guided?  What  is  a  reef? 
A  lighthouse? 

Spell. —  Ocean,     coast    line,    penin- 
strait,     reef, 


8 


PHILIPPINE   GEOGRAPHY   PRIMER 


VII.    Rain 

Water  Vapor. —  Wet  clothes 
placed  in  the  sunshine  become 
dry.  The  water  goes  from  the 
clothes  into  the  air.  Therefore 
we  know  that  there  is  water  in 
the  air.  In  the  same  way,  the 
air  takes  up  water  from  lakes, 
ponds,  and  rivers,  from  wet  land, 
and  from  the  ocean.  The  sun- 
shine breaks  the  water  into  little 
particles  called  water  vapor.  We 
cannot  see  water  vapor,  but  it  is 
always  in  the  air. 


Clouds  and  rain 


Rain.  — Warm  air  takes  up 
water  vapor  from  the  ocean. 
The  winds  carry  it  to  the  high, 
cold  mountains.  The  cold  makes 
the  particles  of  water  unite  and 
form  drops  of  water.  These 
drops  of  water  fall  down  as  rain. 
Rain  makes  the  plants  grow,  and 
forms  brooks,  rivers,  and  lakes. 

Clouds. —  Clouds  are  made  of 
drops  of  water.  These  drops  are 
so  small  and  light  that  they  float 


in  the  air.  When  many  little 
drops  are  near  together,  they 
make  a  cloud. 

Dew.  —  In  the  early  morning 
you  may  often  see  little  drops  of 
water  on  the  grass.  We  call 
these  drops  of  water  dew.  At 
night  the  water  vapor  in  the  air 
cools  and  makes  drops  of  dew  on 
the  grass. 

The  air  takes  up  water  vapor, 
chiefly  from  the  ocean.  Rain, 
clouds,  and  dew  are  made  by  the 
cooling  of  the  water  vapor  in  the 
air. 

Ice  and  snow  are  water  made 
very  hard  by  the  cold.  In  cold 
countries  the  water  freezes  in  the 
winter,  and  the  lakes  and  rivers 
are  covered  with  ice.  In  some 
of  the  larger  Philippine  cities 
there  are  great  machines  for 
making  ice.  People  cool  their 
food  and  water  with  ice. 

Snow  is  found  only  in  cold 
countries,  or  on  high  moun- 
tain tops.  When  the  water  vapor 
in  the  air  becomes  very  cold, 
it  freezes  and  makes  little 
white  particles  called  snowflakes. 
These  particles  fall  from  the 
clouds  and  cover  the  earth  with 
a  coat  of  beautiful,  white  snow. 

When  it  is  very  cold,  water 
vapor  changes  to  snow,  and  water 
changes  to  ice. 


THE  LAND,  THE  WATER,  AND  THE  AIR 


Helps.  —  What  is  water  vapor  ?  Can 
you  see  water  vapor?  How  may  we 
know  that  water  vapor  is  in  the  air? 
What  turns  water  vapor  into  rain? 
Of  what  use  is  rain?  What  are 
clouds?  What  is  dew?  Where  are 
ice  and  snow  made?  What  changes 
water  to  ice?  Of  what  is  snow  made? 
What  changes  water  vapor  to  snow? 
Of  what  use  is  ice  ? 


Spell.  —  Cloud, 
freezes,  vapor. 


flake,       machine, 


VIII.    The  Air 

The  Air.  —  We  cannot  see  the 
air,  but  it  is  all  around  us  and 
high  above  us.  Birds  fly  in  the 
air.  Clouds  float  on  the  air.  We 
breathe  the  air. 

When  the  air  moves  over  the 
earth,  we  call  it  'wind.  A  very 
strong  wind  is  a  storm,  or  gale. 
The  strongest  wind  is  called  a 
typhoon.  In  the  Philippines,  it  is 
often  called  a  baguio.  The  winds 
that  blow  a  long  time  in  the  same 
direction  are  called  in  the  Philip- 
pines monsoons. 


Copyright,  1904,  by  N.  L.  Stebbins. 
Large  ships  are  driven  by  the  wind 


Winds  are  very  useful.  They 
carry  the  water  vapor  to  the 
mountains  and  so  help  to  make 
rain.  They  turn  windmills,  and 
they  drive  skips  over  the  sea. 

Air  is  everywhere  over  the 
earth.  Air  in  motion  is  wind. 
Wind  brings  rain  and  moves  ships. 
Wind  turns  windmills. 

Helps.  —  Where  is  the  air?  Can 
you  see  the  air?  How  do  you  know 
there  is  air?  Of  what  use  is  the  air? 
What  is  wind?  What  is  a  storm,  or 
gale  ?  A  typhoon,  or  baguio?  A  mon- 
soon? What  are  the  uses  of  wind  ? 

Spell.  —  Typhoon,  baguio,  monsoon. 

IX.    Maps 

Maps  show  the  position  of 
places,  or  where  places  are.1 
Maps  also  show  the  distance  be- 
tween places,  or  how  far  one 
place  is  from  another.  A  small 
map  may  show  great  distances. 
On  your  map  it  may  be  only  one 
centimeter  from  your  town  to 
the  nearest  town.  By  the  road 
it  is,  perhaps,  ten  kilometers. 
Then  one  centimeter  on  the  map 
means  ten  kilometers  on  the 
land.  If  two  towns  are  twenty 
kilometers  apart  on  the  land, 
they  will  be  two  centimeters 
apart  on  such  a  map. 

If  it  is  three  centimeters  on 
such  a  map  from  your  town  to 
the  nearest  town,  how  far  will 

1  See  the  map  on  page  10. 


10 


PHILIPPINE   GEOGRAPHY   PKIMER 


it  be  on  the  land  from  your  town 
to  the  nearest  town  ? 

You  may  walk  towards  differ- 
ent places.  Each  place  is  in  a 
certain  direction  from  you. 
Directions  have  names.  The 
direction  in  which  the  sun  rises 
is  called  east.  The  direction  in 
which  the  sun  sets  is  called  west. 


*-. 


\ 


How  to  find  the  North  Star 

There  is  a  star  in  the  heavens 
called  the  North  Star.  The 
direction  of  that  star  from  us  is 
north.  When  we  face  the  north, 
the  direction  behind  us  is  called 
south.  When  we  face  east,  north 
is  on  our  left  hand,  and  south  is 
on  our  right  hand.  South  is  the 
opposite  of  north,  and  west  is  the 
opposite  of  east. 


Northeast  is  halfway  between 
north  and  east.  Where,  then,  is 
southeast  ?  Southwest  ?  North- 
west ? 


WEST 


EAST 


Chart  showing  directions 


A  simple  map.    Compare  with  the 
picture  on  page  7 


Map  Directions.  —  On  maps 
the  top  of  the  map  means  north. 
The  right  side  of  the  map  means 
east.  The  left  side  of  the  map 
means  west.  The  bottom  of  the 
map  means  south. 

On  a  map  the  comparative  size 
of  places  is  shown.  Mindoro  is 
about  twice  as  large  as  Cebu. 
Then  on  a  map  Mindoro  will 
cover  twice  as  much  paper  as 
Cebu. 


THE   LAND,   THE   WATER,   AND   THE   AIR 


11 


A  map  also  shows  the  outline 
of  the  coasts  and  seas.  You 
may  see  on  the  map  every  cape 
and  bay.  Of  what  use  is  this  to 
the  sailor  ? 

Most  maps  are  fiat.  They  do 
not  show  the  difference  between 
the  high  land  and  the  low  land. 
The  map  on  page  29  is  of  a 
different  kind.  That  map  is 
called  a  raised  or  relief  map. 

There  are  many  things  that 
a  map  does  not  show.  People, 
houses,  animals,  and  many  other 
things  cannot  be  well  shown  on 
maps. 

Maps  show  position,  distance, 
direction,  size,  and  outline. 

Helps.  —  How  can  a  map  show  great 
distances?  Where  is  east?  West? 
North?  South?  Northeast?  South- 
east ?  Southwest  ?  Northwest  ? 

What  part  of  a  map  means  north  ? 
East  ?  West  ?  South  ?  How  can  a 
map  show  the  size  of  a  place?  Of 
what  use  is  a  map  to  a  sailor  ?  Name 
two  kinds  of  maps.  What  is  the  dif- 
ference between  a  flat  map  and  a  raised 


map  ?     Name  three  things  maps  do  not 
show  well. 

Spell.  —  Position,    distance,    direc- 
tion, opposite,  outline. 


Review  Questions.  —  Of  what  two 
things  is  the  land  made  ?  What  is 
beneath  the  soil  ?  Why  is  soil  use- 
ful ?  What  is  a  hill  ?  A  mountain  ? 
A  slope  ?  What  is  a  channel  ?  A 
volcano?  A  crater?  What  are  the 
uses  of  mountains  ?  What  is  a  valley  ? 
How  were  most  valleys  made  ?  How 
were  the  mountains  and  some  great 
valleys  made  ?  What  is  a  river  ? 
What  are  rapids  ?  What  is  a  water- 
fall ?  A  delta?  A  flood  plain  ?  A 
river  basin  ?  A  river  system  ?  What 
are  the  uses  of  rivers  ?  What  is  a 
pond  ?  A  lake  ? 

What; is  the  ocean ?  The  tide?  A 
cape  ?  An  island  ?  An  isthmus  ?  A 
bay  ?  A  gulf  ?  A  sea  ?  A  harbor  ? 
A  port?  A  strait?  A  reef?  A 
lighthouse  ? 

What  is  water  vapor  ?  Rain  ? 
What  are  clouds  ?  What  is  dew  ? 
Snow  ?  Ice  ?  How  is  rain  made  ? 
What  is  wind  ?  A  gale  ?  A  typhoon  ? 
A  baguio?  Of  what  use  is  wind? 
Name  five  things  that  maps  show. 
Name  two  kinds  of  maps.  Of  what 
use  is  a  map  ? 


PAET   II 

THE  EARTH   AS   A   WHOLE 

the  axis.     The  two  ends  of  the 
I.   Shape  and  Size  of  the  Earth       ^  ^  ca]led  ^     The  ^ 

The  land  and  water  make  the  that  points  towards  the  North 
eartJ^  or  world.  The  part  of  the  Star  is  called  the  north  pole. 
earth  which  we  ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^  The  other  pole 

sailor  named  equator        is 

Magellan  found  the  Philippines,  about  40,000  kilometers  (25,000 

He  sailed  west  from  Spain  with  miles)  long, 
three   ships.      Two    ships   were         The  distance  through  the  cen- 

lost,  but  one  of   them,  the  Vic-  ter  of  the  earth  from  one  side  of 

toria,  sailed    around    the  world,  the  earth  to  the  other,  is  called 

The  Victoria  never  turned  back  the     diameter.       The     diameter 

east,  but  sailed  on  and  on  to  the  of    the    earth   is    about    12,800 

west.     At  last  she  reached  Spain  kilometers  (8000    miles)    long, 
again.      Then    men    knew   that 

the  earth  is  round.  Size  of  the  Earth'  - ' The  earth 

is   very   large.     It    takes   manv 
She  earth  is  a  great  round  ball     weeks?        •         Qn    the     fastjt 

Ships  sail  around  it.  steamers  and  railway  trains,  to 

Axis    and    Poles.  —  We   think  go  around  the  world.     The  earth 

of  a  long  line  through  the  center  is  larger  than  the  moon,  but  the 

of  the  earth.     This  line  we  call  sun   is  very  many  times   larger 

12 


THE   EAETH   AS   A   WHOLE 


13 


than  the   earth.     The   sun   and  the  sun  seems  to  rise  in  the  east. 

the   moon    look    small     because  It  is  because  we  are  then  mov- 

they  are  very  far  from  the  earth,  ing   toward  the    sun.     The   sun 

The  earth  is  very  large,  but  the  seems  to  set  in  tne  west?  because 


sun  is  much  larger. 

II.    Motions  of  the  Earth 

Rotation.  —  The  earth  seems 
to  be  still.  We  cannot  see  it 
move.  We  cannot  feel  its  mo- 
tion. The  sun  seems  to  move 
across  the  sky.  But  the  sun 
does  not  move.  It  stands  still 
and  the  earth  moves. 

The  earth  turns  around  its 
axis  once  every  twenty-four 
hours.  This  motion  is  called 
the  rotation  of  the  earth.  To 
rotate  is  to  turn  around  as  a 
top  turns  when  it  spins. 


when  the  sun  is  setting  we  are 


NORTH 


POLE 


SOUTH 


POLE 

Point  out  the  diameter  of  the  earth 

The   earth    turns  on   its   axis 
from  west  to  east.     This  is  why 


S°UTHPOLE 


moving  from  the  sun.  It  is  be- 
cause we  cannot  see  the  motion 
of  the  earth  that  we  think  the 
sun  moves. 

Day  and  Night.  —  Hold  an 
orange  or  a  ball  before  the  light 
of  a  lamp.  You  will  see  that 
one  half  of  the  orange  or  ball  is 
in  the  light  and  the  other  half 
in  the  darkness,  It  is  the  same 
with  the  earth.  Half  of  the 
earth  is  always  in  the  sunlight, 
and  half  of  it  is  always  in  the 
darkness.1 

The  rotation  of  the  earth  on 
its  axis  once  in  every  twenty- 
four  hours  makes  day  and  night. 

1  See  picture  on  page  14. 


14 


PHILIPPINE   GEOGRAPHY   PEIMEK 


It  is  day  for  us  when  our  part  of 
the  earth  is  facing  the  sun.  It 
is  night  for  us  when  the  earth 
has  turned  and  is  between  us 
and  the  sun.  When  it  is  day 


One  half  is  in  the  light,  and  one  half  is  in  darkness 

where  we  are,  it  is  night  on  the 
other  side  of  the  world.  When 
it  is  day  in  the  Philippines,  on 
what  part  of  the  earth  is  it 
night  ? 

The  sun  stands  still.  Tlie 
earth  moves  around  its  axis  from 
west  to  east.  This  motion  of  the 
earth  causes  day  and  night. 


Helps.  —  Of  what  is  the  earth  made  ? 
What  is  the  shape  of  the  earth? 
How  do  we  know  that  the  earth  is 
round  ?  What  is  the  axis  of  the  earth  ? 
The  poles?  The  north  pole?  The 
south  pole?  The  equator?  The  di- 
ameter? How  far  is  it 
around  the  earth?  How 
far  is  it  through  the 
earth  ?  Look  on  the  globe 
and  see  what  continent 
lies  down  through  the  cen- 
ter of  the  earth  from  the 
Philippines.  How  far  must 
one  travel  from  the  Phil- 
ippines to  reach  the  place 
on  the  surface  of  the 
earth  which  is  opposite 
the  Philippines  ?  How 
far  is  it  to  that  place  through  the  center 
of  the  earth  ?  Is  the  earth  larger  or 
smaller  than  the  moon  ?  Than  the  sun '/ 


\ 


\ 


The  Year.  —  Besides  rotating 
on  its  axis  every  day,  the  earth 
has  another  kind  of  motion.  It 
moves  in  a  long  path  around  the 
sun.  The  path  of  the  earth 
around  the  sun  is  almost  a  circle. 
The  sun  is  in  the  center  of  the 
circle.  The  earth  moves  around 
the  sun  once  in  365J  days.  This 
time  is  a  year. 

A  year  is  the  time  that  it  takes 
the  earth  to  move  around  the  sun. 


The  path  of  the  earth  around  the  sun 

Why  do  the  sun  and  the  moon  look 
small  ? 

Does   the    sun    move   around    the 
What   is  the  rotation  of  the 
How    often    does    the   earth 
What  makes  the  sun  seem  to 
To   set?     How   much   of   the 


earth  ? 
earth  ? 
rotate  ? 
rise? 


earth  is  always  in  the  sunlight  ?  In 
the  darkness  ?  When  is  it  day  ?  When 
is  it  night  ?  What  is  a  year  ? 

Spell.  —  Equator,  diameter,  axis. 


THE   EARTH   AS   A   WHOLE 


15 


III.    The  Zones 

Hold  a  globe,1  with  the  north 
pole  pointing  up,  before  the  light 
of  a  candle.  You  will  see  that 
the  light  falls  directly  on  the 
equator,  and  that  near  the  poles 
there  is  less  light.  Rotate  the 
globe,  and  you  will  understand 
that  because  of  the  bright  light 
day  after  day,  there  is  a  warm 
belt  around  the  earth  near  the 
equator. 

Close  to  the  poles  not  so  much 
light  falls  on  the  earth's  surface. 
Therefore,  these  parts  of  the 
earth  are  cold.  Between  the 
warm  and  the  cold  regions,  there 
are  two  other  broad  belts  around 


head  a  part  of  the  year.  The 
part  of  the  earth  where  the  sun 
is  sometimes  directly  overhead,  is 
called  the  torrid  zone. 


The  zones 

the  earth,  where  it  is  neither 
very  hot  nor  very  cold.  These 
five  divisions  of  the  earth's  sur- 
face are  called  zones. 

The  Torrid  Zone.  — For  a  long 
distance  north  and  south  of  the 
equator  the  sun  is  directly  over- 

1  If  no  globe  is  at  hand,  an  orange  or 
chico  with  a  stick  through  the  center  may 
be  used. 


A  scene  in  the  torrid  zone 

In  the  torrid  zone  it  is  always 
warm.  There  is  no  snow  or  ice 
in  this  zone,  except  on  the  high- 
est mountains.  Most  of  the 
brown  and  black  people  of 
the  world  live  in  the  torrid 
zone.  The  Philippine  Islands 
are  in  the  torrid  zone. 

Many  great  forests  and 
useful  plants  grow  in  the 
torrid  zone.  Many  fruits, 
such  as  the  mango,  papaya, 
and  chico  grow  only  in  the  torrid 
zone.  The  tiger,1  the  lion,  and  the 
elephant,2  and  many  other  large 
wild  animals  live  in  this  zone. 


1  See  pic- 
ture of  tiger 
on  page  70. 

2  See   pic- 
ture  of    ele- 
p  h  a  n  t     on 
page  67. 


Lion 


16 


PHILIPPINE   GEOGRAPHY   PRIMER 


The    Frigid   Zones.  —  The    far 

north  and  south  parts  of  the 
world  are  always  cold.  "  Frigid  " 
means  cold;  therefore,  those  parts 
of  the  earth  are  called  the  frigid 
zones.  In  these  zones  the  land 
is  often  covered  with  ice  and 


In  the  frigid  zone.    Eskimos  killing  a  walrus 

snow.  Few  trees  grow  in  the 
frigid  zones.  The  sea  is  cold, 
and  great  fields  and  hills  of  ice 
float  over  the  water. 

In  the  summer  many  birds, 
such  as  ducks  and  sea-gulls,  come 
from  the  warmer  zones  to  these 
cold  regions.  There  are  many 
seals,  wralruses,  and  whales  in  the 
waters  of  the  frigid  zones.  Few 
land  animals  are  found  there  be- 
cause few  trees  and  plants  grow 
for  them  to  eat ;  but  the  great 
white  polar  bear  and  the  reindeer 
are  found  in  the  north  frigid  zone. 
The  polar  bear  eats  fish  and  seals, 
and  the  reindeer  eats  little  plants. 

A  few  people  live  in  the  north 
frigid  zone.  In  the  south  frigid 


zone  no  people  have  yet  been 
found.  The  people  of  the  north 
frigid  zone  are  called  Eskimos. 
They  are  very  short,  and  dress 
in  the  skins  of  animals.  They 
have  no  fruits  and  plant  no 
crops,  but  eat  the  flesh  of  animals 
and  fish.  In  the  winter  they 
sometimes  live  in  houses 
made  of  snow  and  ice. 

The  Temperate  Zones.  - 
The  parts  of  the  world  be- 
tween the  torrid  zone  and  the 
frigid  zones  are  called  the  tem- 
perate zones.  One  is  called 
the  north  temperate  zone,  and 
the  other  the  south  temperate 
zone.  "Temperate"  means 
not  very  hot  or  very  cold. 
In  the  temperate  zones  it  is  some- 
times hot  and  sometimes  cold.  - 


Winter.    The  ground  is  covered  with  snow 

The  cold  part  of  the  year  is 
called  winter.  The  hot  part  of 
the  year  is  called  summer.  The 
winter  in  the  temperate  zones 
is  not  so  cold  as  in  the  frigid 


THE   EARTH   AS   A   WHOLE 


17 


zones.     The  summer   is   not   so 
hot  as  in  the  torrid  zone. 

After  winter  comes  spring. 
Then  the  snow  and  the  ice  of 
winter  turn  into  water.  The 
grass  and  leaves  grow  again. 
Flowers  bloom  and  the  birds 
come  from  the  torrid  zone. 
Summer  follows  spring.  In  the 
hot  months  of  summer  the  fruits 
and  grain  ripen. 


An  autumn  scene  in  the  north  temperate  zone 

After  summer  comes  autumn, 
or  the  fall.  The  days  then  grow 
cooler.  The  leaves  fall  and  the 
flowers  die.  The  grass  turns 
brown.  After  autumn  comes 
winter.  Spring,  summer,  autumn 
and  winter,  are  the  four  seasons  of 
the  temperate  zones. 

There  is  less  rain  in  the  temper- 
ate zones  than  in  the  torrid  zone. 
There  is  not  so  much  rich  soil  as  in 
the  torrid  zone.  Yet  some  of  the 
largest  and  best  crops  in  the  world 
grow  in  the  temperate  zones. 

More  people  are  found  in  the 
temperate  zones  than  in  all  the 
other  zones.  Most  of  the  white 
race  live  there.  The  people  of 


this  zone  have  made  the  steam- 
ship, the  railroad,  and  many 
machines,  and  they  are  very  hard 
workers.  For  these  reasons  they 
are  richer  than  the  people  of  the 
other  zones. 

There  are  three  kinds  of  zones 
—  the  torrid,  the  temperate,  and 
the  frigid.  They  have  different 
seasons,  plants,  animals,  and 
races  of  people. 

Helps.  —  What  is  a  zone  ?  In  what 
part  of  the  world  is  the  sun  directly 
overhead  for  a  part  of  the  year  ? 
Where  is  the  torrid  zone  ?  Is  it  warm 
or  cold  in  the  torrid  zone  ?  What  peo- 
ples live  in  the  torrid  zone  ?  Name 
some  fruits  that  grow  only  in  the  tor- 
rid zone.  Name  some  of  the  large 
animals  of  the  torrid  zone.  In  what 
zone  is  the  Philippine  Islands  ? 

Where  are  the  frigid  zones  ?  What 
often  covers  land  and  sea  in  these  zones  ? 
Do  birds  live  there  ?  What  animals 
are  found  in  the  seas  of  the  frigid 
zones?  What  land  animals  live  in 
these  zones?  Who  are  the  people? 
What  do  they  eat  ?  Of  what  do  they 
build  their  winter  houses  ? 

Where  are  the  temperate  zones  ? 
What  does  "  temperate  "  mean  ?  What 
is  winter  ?  Spring  ?  Summer  ? 
Autumn,  or  fall  ?  What  does  "  season  " 
mean  ?  Is  there  much  rain  in  the 
temperate  zones  ?  Is  the  soil  good  ? 
Do  good  crops  grow  in  the  temperate 
zones  ?  What  kind  of  people  live 
there  ?  What  do  they  make  ?  Why 
are  they  richer  than  the  people  of  the 
other  zones  ? 

Spell.  —  Torrid,  elephant,  frigid, 
walrus,  seal,  temperate,  autumn,  sea- 
son, railroad,  Eskimos,  reindeer. 


18 


PHILIPPINE   GEOGRAPHY   PRIMER 


IV.     The  Continents  and  Oceans 

A  half  of  the  earth  is  called 
a  hemisphere.  "  Sphere  "  means 
a  ball,  and  "  hemi  "  means  half. 


NORTH 


The  half  of  the  world  north 
of  equator  is  the  northern  hemi- 
sphere. Most  of  the  land  is  in  the 
northern  hemisphere.  The  half 
south  of  the  equator  is  the  south- 
ern hemisphere. 

We  also  divide  the  world  into 
the  eastern  hemisphere  and  the 
western  hemisphere.  The  eastern 
is  called  the  Old  World  and  the 
western  the  New  World.  Can 
you  tell  why? 

Continents. — A  very  large  body 
of  land  mostly  or  entirely  sur- 
rounded by  water,  is  called  a 
continent.  In  the  western  hemi- 
sphere there  are  two  con- 
tinents, North  America  and 
South  America.  In  the  eastern 
hemisphere  there  are  four  conti- 
nents, Europe,  Asia,  Africa,  and 
Australia.  Europe  and  Asia  are 


sometimes  counted  together  as 
one  continent.  This  continent 
is  then  called  Eurasia. 

The  Oceans.  —  Between  the 
continents  are  very  wide  bodies 
of  salt  water.  The  whole  of 
this  water  is  called  the  ocean, 
or  the  sea.  The  large  divisions 
of  the  ocean  or  the  sea  are  called 
oceans.  Find  the  oceans  and  name 
them.  Which  is  the  largest? 
Which  is  nearest  the  Philippines  ? 


The  northern  hemisphere 


The  southern  hemisphere 


THE   EAKTH   AS   A   WHOLE 


19 


The  western  hemisphere 

Helps.  —  What  does  hemisphere 
mean  ?  Which  is  the  land  hemisphere  ? 
The  water  hemisphere  ?  What  is  a 
continent  ?  What  continents  are  in 
the  eastern  hemisphere  ?  The  western? 

What  is  the  ocean  ?  What  other 
name  has  the  ocean  ?  What  are  the 
large  divisions  of  the  ocean  called  ? 
What  ocean  is  farthest  north  ?  Far- 
thest south  ?  What  ocean  is  between 
Asia  and  the  Americas  ?  Between 
Australia  and  Africa?  What  ocean 
is  south  of  Asia?  North  of  North 
America  ?  North  of  Europe  ?  WThat 
ocean  is  east  of  North  America  ? 
West  of  North  America?  East  of 
South  America?  South  of  South 
America?  West  of  South  America? 
What  ocean  is  west  of  Africa  ?  East  ? 
South  ?  What  ocean  is  west  of 
Europe?  North  of  Europe?  What 
ocean  is  east  and  south  of  Australia  ? 
West  of  Australia?  Name  all  the 
oceans. 

Spell.  —  Hemisphere,  Eurasia,  Eu- 
rope, Asia,  Africa,  America,  Australia, 
continent,  Arctic,  Antarctic,  Atlantic, 
Pacific. 


The  eastern  hemisphere 

Map  Questions.1 — Where  is  north  on 
this  map  ?  Where  is  south  ?  East  ? 
West  ?  Find  the  six  continents  on 
this  map.  Find  the  five  oceans.  Find 
the  Philippine  Islands.  Find  the 
United  States.  Find  Spain. 

Which  continent  is  nearest  the 
Philippines  ?  What  continent  is  south 
of  the  Philippines?  What  direction 
is  the  United  States  from  the  Philip- 
pines ?  What  direction  is  South  Amer- 
ica from  the  Philippines  ?  What 
direction  is  Africa  ?  (See  map,  pages 
68  and  69.)  What  group  of  islands 
is  north  of  the  Philippines  ?  WThat 
small  island  is  between  the  Phil- 
ippines and  China?  What  ocean  is 
east  of  the  Philippines  ?  West  ? 

What  cape  is  at  the  southern  end  of 
South  America  ?  Of  Africa  ?  When 
Magellan's  ship,  the  Victoria,  sailed 
around  the  world,  she  passed  these  two 
capes.  On  the  map  and  on  the  globe, 
find  the  route  of  the  Victoria  west 
around  the  world.  Name  the  oceans 
over  which  she  sailed.  By  what 
other  route  do  ships  now  go  from  the 

1  See  the  map  on  page  21. 


20 


PHILIPPINE   GEOGRAPHY  PRIMER 


Philippines  to  Spain?  (By  the  Suez 
Canal.)  What  oceans  and  seas  do 
they  cross  on  this  route  ?  What  ocean 
would  you  cross  in  sailing  from  the 
Philippines  to  the  western  port  of  the 
United  States  ?  In  sailing  west  to  the 
eastern  coast  of  the  United  States  ? 

V.     The  Great  Races  of  Mankind 

Races.  —  Men  speak  different 
languages  and  have  different 
customs.  They  do  not  all  look 
alike.  We  may  say  that  men  who 
have  the  same  color  belong  to  the 
same  race.  Then  we  shall  find 
five  races  of  men.  They  are, 
the  ivhite,  the  yellow,  the  black, 
the  brown,  and  the  red  races. 

The  White  Race. — The  white,  or 
Caucasian,  race  is  the  most  nu- 
merous. More  than  one  third  of 
all  men  belong  to  the  white  race. 
Most  people  of  this  race  live  in 
Europe,  but  they  are  also  found 
on  every  other  continent. 

The  white  people  live  chiefly 
in  the  temperate  zones,  the  best 
part  of  the  world  for  man's  home. 
They  have  better  health  and 


more  strength  and  energy  than 
the  people  who  live  in  hot  coun- 
tries. More  than  one  half  of  all 
the  land  in  the  world  belongs  to 
the  white  race.  They  have  good 
schools.  The  people  are  intelli- 
gent, they  work  hard,  and  they 
use  machinery  in  their  work. 
For  these  reasons  the  white  race 
is  the  richest  and  most  powerful 
of  all  the  races. 

The  Yellow  Race. --The  peo- 
ple of  the  yellow,  or  Mongolian, 
race  live  chiefly  in  eastern  Asia. 
China  is  the  home  of  most  of  the 
yellow  race.  The  yellow  race  is 
nearly  as  numerous  as  the  white 
race.  The  yellow  people  are  hard 
workers,  but  they  have  few  ma- 
chines. None  of  them  except  the 
Japanese  have  good  schools. 

The  Black  Race. —  The  people 
of  the  black,  or  Negro,  race  live 
mostly  in  Africa.  The  black 
people  are  very  ignorant.  They 
have  very  few  clothes  and  poor 
houses.  They  have  no  fine  cities. 
Most  black  people  are  called  Ne- 


Caucasian,  or  white 


Mongolian,  or  yellow 


Negro,  or  black 


Malayan,  or  brown 


22 


PHILIPPINE   GEOGRAPHY  PEIMER 


groes.     The  blacks  of  the  Philip- 
pines are  called  Negritos. 

The  Brown  Race.  —  Most  Fili- 
pinos belong  to  the  broivn,  or 
Malayan,  race.  The  brown  people 
live  on  the  Malay  Peninsula,  on 
most  of  the  islands  between  Asia 
and  Australia,  and  on  most  of 
the  islands  of  the  Pacific  Ocean. 
The  brown  race  has  better  schools 
and  towns  than  the  black  race. 
The  brown  people  are  learning  to 
become  great.  Any  race  that  will 
study  and  work  hard  can  become 
great. 

The  Red  Race.  —  The  red  race 
is  the  least  numerous  of  the  five 
races.  Most  of  the  red  race  live 
in  the  two  Americas.  They  are 
called  American 
Indians.  Before 
the  white  people 
came  to  America 
the  Indians 
were  savages 
and  lived  by 
hunting  and 
fishing.  Now 
many  of  them 
are  farmers. 

There  are  jive  great  races. 
Work  and  study  are  the  principal 
things  that  make  a  race  strong. 

Helps.  —  Name  three  ways  in  which 
men  are  different.  How  many  races 
are  there?  Which  race  is  the  most 
numerous?  Where  do  most  of  the 


American  Indian 
mother  and  child 


white  race  live  ?  Where  else  are  white 
people  found  ?  Give  four  reasons  why 
the  white  race  is  strong  and  rich. 
Where  do  the  people  of  the  yellow 
race  live  ?  Do  these  people  work  more 
with  their  hands  or  with  machines  ? 

In  what  continent  do  most  of  the 
black  people  live  ?  Are  they  civilized  ? 
What  are  the  black  people  of  Africa 
called  ?  What  are  the  blacks  of  the 
Philippines  called  ? 

To  what  race  do  most  Filipinos  be- 
long ?  Where  do  most  of  this  race 
live?  Has  the  black  or  the  brown 
race  the  better  schools  and  towns  ? 
Which  is  the  least  numerous  race? 
Where  do  they  live  ? 

Spell.  — Negroes,  Negritos,  savage, 
intelligent. 

VI.    Industry  and  Commerce 

Hunting  and  Fishing.  —  The 
kind  of  work  which  a  man  does 
is  called  his  occupation,  or  indus- 
try. Hunting  animals  is  the 
oldest  occupation  of  man.  Catch- 
ing fish  is  another  very  old  occu- 
pation. Hunting  and  fishing  are 
very  uncertain  ways  of  living. 
The  hunter  and  the  fisherman  are 
often  hungry.  Why  ? 

Agriculture.  —  The  occupation 
of  most  men  is  agriculture,  or 
farming.  In  nearly  every  coun- 
try there  are  many  farmers.  In 
the  Philippines  more  than  half 
the  men  are  farmers.  The  tor- 
rid zone  is  the  best  place  for 
farming.  There  the  land  is  fer- 
tile, -and  men  can  plant  and  reap 
every  month  in  the  year.  Yet 


THE   EAETH   AS   A   WHOLE 


23 


one  farmer  of  the  temperate  zones 
often  gets  more  food  from  the 
ground  than  several  farmers  of 
the  torrid  zone.  This  is  because 
farmers  in  the  temperate  zones 
use  machines  for  doing  their 
work. 


A  large  ocean  steamer  for  carrying  on  commerce 

Commerce.  -  -  Farmers  often 
raise  more  food  than  they  can 
eat.  They  need  many  things 
besidesfood.  To  buy  these  things 
the  farmer  sells  the  food  that  he 
does  not  need.  This  buying  and 
selling,  and  carrying  goods  from 
place  to  place,  is  called  commerce. 
People  who  buy  and  sell  are 
called  merchants. 

Manufacturing.  —  The  manu- 
facturer is  the  man  who  makes 
things  out  of  wood,  metal,  and 
other  materials.  Tools,  clothes, 
and  many  other  things  that  we 
use  are  manufactured.  Most  of 
the  manufacturers  live  in  the 
cities  of  the  temperate  zones. 
There  are  not  many  manufac- 
turers in  the  Philippines,  because 
the  Philippines  are  a  farming 
country. 

Helps.  —  What  does  "occupation" 
mean?  What  are  the  oldest  occupa- 


tions ?  Are  these  the  best  occupations  ? 
Why?  Are  there  any  people  in  the 
Philippines  who  live  by  hunting?  Do 
they  live  in  the  mountains  or  in  the 
valleys  ?  Why  ?  Are  there  many 
Filipino  fishermen  ?  What  is  the  oc- 
cupation of  most  men?  Which  zone 
is  the  best  for  farming?  Why?  In 
which  zone  do  farmers  get  the  most 
for  their  work  ?  Why  ?  Name  some 
things  the  farmer  needs  besides  food. 
How  does  the  farmer  get  these  things  ? 
What  is  commerce?  Why  is  com- 
merce necessary  ?  What  are  the  people 
who  carry  on  commerce  called  ?  What 
is  a  manufacturer?  Where  do  most 
manufacturers  live  ?  Are  the^re  many 
manufacturers  in  the  Philippines  ? 
WThy? 

Spell. — Occupation,  industry,  agri- 
culture, manufacturer,  commerce,  mer- 
chant. 

VII.     Government 

The  father  commands  his  chil- 
dren and  they  obey.  This  is 
family  government.  Some  of  the 
mountain  people  of  the  Philip- 
pines have  only  family  govern- 
ment. 

When  men  live  in  towns,  they 
need  a  different  kind  of  govern- 
ment. The  men  who  take  care 
of  the  roads,  the  schools,  and 
other  things  that  all  the  people 
of  the  town  use,  form  the  town 
government. 

When  the  people  of  many 
towns  have  one  government  for 
all  the  towns,  they  form  a  state 
or  nation  if  no  other  people  rule 
them.  The  government  of  the 


PHILIPPINE   GEOGRAPHY   PEIMEK 


whole  nation  is  the  national  gov- 
ernment. A  country  is  the  land 
where  the  people  of  a  nation  live. 
A  colony  is  a  country  ruled  by 
another  country. 

A  nation  is  usually  governed 
by  a  king  or  a  president.  A 
king  has  great  power.  In  some 
countries  he  can  take  the  life  of 
any  of  his  people.  A  king  usu- 
ally rules  as  long  as  he  lives. 
When  he  dies,  his  son  is  made 
ruler  of  the  country.  A  presi- 
dent is  elected  by  the  people. 
He  holds  the  office  for  a  few 
years ;  then  another  man  is  elected 
in  his  place. 

A  country  ruled  by  a  king  is 
called  a  kingdom.  If  the  kingdom 
is  large  and  has  many  people,  it 
is  called  an  empire.  The  ruler  of 
an  empire  is  called  an  emperor. 
Most  of  the  countries  of  the 
world  are  ruled  by  kings  or  em- 
perors. A  country  with  a  presi- 
dent is  called  a  republic. 

When  a  country  has  several 
parts,  the  ruler  of  each  part  is 
often  called  a  governor.  There 
is  one  governor  general  for  all  the 
Philippines,  and  a  governor  for 
each  of  the  thirty-eight  provinces 
of  the  Philippines.  The  place 
where  the  ruler  of  a  country  lives, 
or  where  the  government  is  con- 
ducted, is  called  the  capital. 

Helps. — What  is  family  government? 
What  two  other  kinds  of  government 


are  there  ?  What  is  a  nation  or  state  ? 
What  is  a  country  ?  What  is  a  king  ? 
Has  a  king  much  power?  How  long 
does  a  king  rule  ?  What  is  his  country 
called  ?  What  is  an  empire  ?  What 
is  the  ruler  of  an  empire  called?  tVhat 
is  a  republic  ?  A  president  ?  By  whom 
is  a  president  elected  ?  How  long  does 
he  rule?  Who  is  President  of  the 
United  States  ?  What  is  a  governor? 
What  is  the  highest  official  of  the 
Philippines  called ?  What  is  the  high- 
est official  of  each  province  called? 
What  is  a  capital  ? 

Spell. — Empire,  emperor,  nation, 
state,  country,  republic,  president,  capi- 
tal, governor  general. 

Review  Questions  on  Part  II. —  How 
do  we  know  that  the  earth  is  round  ? 
What  is  the  axis  of  the  earth  ?  What 
is  the  rotation  of  the  earth  ?  In  what 
direction  does  the  earth  rotate  ?  What 
is  a  year  ?  Name  the  zones.  Why 
are  the  people  of  the  temperate  zones 
rich?  How  much  of  the  earth's  sur- 
face is  land?  How  much  is  water? 
Name  the  continents.  Name  the  oceans 
and  tell  what  continents  each  ocean 
touches.  Name  five  things  that  maps 
show.  Of  what  use  are  maps  ?  Name 
the  five  races.  Tell  in  which  conti- 
nent each  race  lives.  Which  race  is 
the  most  civilized?  Which  race  is  the 
least  civilized  ?  Name  five  great  occu- 
pations. Why  is  there  little  manufac- 
turing in  the  Philippines  ?  Name  three 
kinds  of  government.  Tell  what  is 
meant  by  each  kind.  What  is  a  king  ? 
A  kingdom?  An  emperor?  An  em- 
pire ?  A  president  ?  A  republic  ?  A 
nation  or  state?  A  country?  Who 
is  governor  general  of  the  Philippines  ? 
Who  is  governor  of  your  province  ? 
What  city  is  the  capital  of  the  Philip- 
pines? What  city  is  the  capital  of 
your  province  ? 


PART  III 


THE   PHILIPPINE   ISLANDS 


I.     The   Philippines   as  a  Whole 

Position.  —  A  group  of  many 
islands  is  called  an  archipelago. 
The  Philippine  Archipelago  lies 
between  Asia  and  Australia. 
To  which  of  these  continents  is 
it  nearer  ?  In  what  zone  is  it  ? 
Name  the  waters  that  surround 
it.  (See  the  map  on  page  29.) 

Number. — There  are  more 
than  three  thousand  Philippine 
Islands.  Many  of  them  are  only 
small  rocks.  People  live  on  less 
than  three  hundred  of  the  islands. 
There  are  only  twelve  islands  of 
great  importance.  They  are : 
Luzon,  Mindanao,  Sdmar,  Ne- 
gros,  Panay,  Palawan,  Mindoro, 
Leyte,  Cebu,  Boliol,  Masbate,  and 
Jolo.  Most  of  the  Filipino  people 
live  on  these  twelve,  islands. 

Surface.  —  All  the  larger  is- 
lands are  mountainous.  Most  of 
the  mountain  ranges  run  north 
and  south.  (See  the  map  on 
page  29.)  There  are  more 
than  twenty  active  volcanoes. 
Upon  the  mountain  slopes  and 
along  many  of  the  rivers  are 
thick  forests.  The  coasts  are 
very  irregular.  The  coasts  of 
the  Philippines,  if  placed  in  a 


straight  line,  would  reach  half- 
way around  the  world. 

Rivers. —  Many  short,  swift 
rivers  run  to  the  sea.  Swift 
rivers  bring  much  soil  from  the 
mountains,  so  the  valleys  of  such 
rivers  are  very  fertile.  Only  a 
small  part  of  the  soil  is  culti- 
vated. 


Copyright,  1906,  by  C.  W.  Hodgson. 
The  Abra  River  and  its  fertile  flood  plain 

Public  Land.  —  About  one 
seventh  of  all  the  land  is  owned 
by  the  Filipinos.  The  rest  is 
public  land.  Any  male  Filipino 
more  than  twenty-one  years  old 
may  have  for  himself  sixteen 
hectares  of  this  public  land  by 
living  and  working  upon  it  for 
five  years.  Land  obtained  in 
this  way  is  called  a  homestead. 

The  Philippines  are  mountain- 
ous, irregular  islands.  There  are 
great  forests,  many  rivers,  and 
rich  valleys.  There  is  much  rich, 
uncultivated  land. 


25 


28 


PHILIPPINE   GEOGRAPHY   PRIMER 


Helps. — What  is  an  archipelago  ? 
Where  are  the  Philippines?  How 
many  Philippine  Islands  are  there? 
What  are  many  of  them?  How  many 
islands  are  inhabited?  How  many 
islands  are  of  great  importance? 
Name  them.  Are  there  many  moun- 
tains ?  Tell  about  the  rivers.  The 
valleys.  The  coasts.  Is  much  of  the 
soil  cultivated?  How  much  of  the 
land  do  Filipinos  own?  How  much 
public  land  may  a  Filipino  get  for  his 
own  ?  What  must  he  do  to  own  this 
land  ? 

Spell.  —  Archipelago,  Luz6n,  Min- 
danao, Palawan,  Leyte,  Masbate,  Jolo, 
Cebii,  Panay,  Mindoro,  Bohol. 


1.  Climate  and  Products 

Climate. — Summer  and  winter 
are  much  alike  in  the  Philippines.. 
It  is  always  warm,  except  upon 
the  high  mountain  tops.  Yet 
there  are  seasons  in  the  Philip- 
pines. In  most  of  the  islands  it 
rains  for  several  months;  then 
the  days  are  dry  and  sunny  for 
several  months.  There  are,  then, 
two  seasons  in  the  Philippine 
Islands,  a  rainy  season  and  a 
dry  season. 

The  winds  bring  the  water 
vapor  from  the  sea  to  the  land. 
From  June  to  November  the 
wind  blows  from  the  China  Sea, 
from  southwest  to  northeast, 
across  the  Philippines.  This 
wind  is  called  the  southwest 
monsoon.  This  wind  carries 
much  water  vapor.  The  high 


mountains  cool  the  water  vapor, 
and  it  falls  as  rain.  After  the 
wind  passes  over  the  mountains 
it  is  a  dry  wind.  So,  when  it 
rains  on  the  west  side  of  the  moun- 
tains it  is  dry  on  the  east  side. 


Copyright,  1006,  by  C.  W.  Hodgson. 
A  path  through  a  Philippine  forest 

From  November  to  June  the 
wind  blows  in  the  opposite  direc- 
tion from  that  of  the  southwest 
monsoon.  What  direction  is 
that?  From  what  ocean  does  this 
monsoon  come  ?  Which  is  then 
the  rainy  side  of  the  islands  ? 

More  rain  falls  on  the  east 
coasts  of  Luzon,  Samar,  and 
Mindanao  than  in  other  parts 
of  the  islands.  The  driest  part 
of  the  Philippines  is  in  the  Ca- 
gayan  valley,  Luzon. 


< 

» 

'S) 


< 
£ 


u 


RELIEF  MAP  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  ISLANDS 


30 


PHILIPPINE   GEOGRAPHY   PRIMER 


Plants.  —  Most  plants  need 
plenty  of  rain  and  heat.  The  cli- 
mate of  the  Philippines  is  hot  and 
moist.  Everywhere  there  are 
many  plants.  Great  forests  on 


Most  kinds  of  rice  grow  best 
on  wet  lowlands,  but  there  are 
kinds  that  grow  well  on  the 
highlands. 

Rice  needs  plenty  of  water.  In 
the  mountain  slopes  and  in  river  dry  years  the  rice  crop  is  very 
valleys  cover  more  than  one  half  small.  There  are  many  rice  fields 
the  surface 
of  the  Phil- 
i  p  p  i  n  e  s. 
Many  Filipi- 
nos live  on 
plants  which 
grow  with 
little  culti- 
vation, like 
the  banana, 
coconut, 
and  many 
other  fruits. 


near  rivers. 
The  water 
should  be 
brought  in 
canals  from 
these  rivers 
to  the  fields. 
Then  two 
crops  of  rice 
in- 


The  water  flows  from  the  higher  to  the  lower  rice  fields. 
Two  crops  a  year  are  raised 


a    year, 
stead  of  one, 
could      be 
raised. 

Besides  food  plants,  there  are  The  Philippines  have  a  warm 
in  most  of  the  islands  the  lam-  climate,  with  a  wet  and  a  dry  sea- 
loo  and  bejuco,  or  rattan  palm,  son.  There  are  great  forests  and 
so  useful  for  making  furniture.  many  usefui  plants.  Much  rice 
There  are  other  valuable  palms,  is  raised. 


such  as  the  areca,  coconut,  bum, 
and  nipa.  Indigo  is  a  valuable 
plant,  from  which  comes  a  ma- 
terial used  to  color  cloth  blue. 

Rice.  —  The  chief  cultivated 
plant  is  rice.  It  grows  on  most 
of  the  islands,  and  is  the  main 
food  of  most  Filipinos.  The 
largest  amount  of  good  rice 
land  is  in  central^  Luzon.  Pan- 
gasinan,  Nueva  Ecija,  and  Tar- 
lac  raise  about  half  of  all  the 
rice  grown  in  the  Philippines. 


Helps.  —  What  kind  of  climate  have 
the  Philippines  ?  What  are  the  sea- 
sons in  the  Philippines  ?  What  are 
the  two  monsoons  called?  In  what 
months  does  the  southwest  monsoon 
blow?  To  what  parts  of  the  islands 
does  it  bring  rain  ?  In  what  months 
does  the  northeast  monsoon  blow  ?  To 
what  parts  of  the  islands  does  it  bring 
rain  ?  Which  parts  of  the  islands  re- 
ceive the  most  rain  ?  The  least  rain  ? 

Are  there  many  plants  in  the  Phil- 
ippines? Why?  On  what  kind  of 
plants  do  many  Filipinos  live? 
Name  three  plants  of  use  in  build- 


THE   PHILIPPINE   ISLANDS 


31 


ing  houses.  Name  all  the  kinds  of 
palms  that  you  know.  For  what  is 
indigo  used  ?  What  plant  is  most  cul- 
tivated in  the  islands  ?  How  many 
kinds  of  rice  are  there  in  the  Philip- 
pines? Where  are  the  largest  rice 
fields  ?  How  may  two  rice  crops  be 
raised  in  one  year  ? 

Spell.  —  Monsoon,     bejuco,    indigo, 
valuable. 

2.  Products — Continued 
Corn.  —  This  useful  plant  was 
brought  to  the  Philippines  from 
Mexico.  Corn  is  much  easier  to 
cultivate  than  rice,  because  it 
does  not  need  so  much  water. 
In  northern  Luzon,  in  Cebu,  and 
in  Panay,  a  large  amount  of  corn 
is  raised  and  eaten.  Corn  is  very 
good  food  also  for  horses  and 
cattle.  Much  land  where  rice  does 
not  grow  well  is  good  for  corn. 


A  sugar  mill 

Sugar  is  made  in  the  Philip- 
pines from  the  sap  of  the  sugar- 
cane. The  cane  is  cut  and 
ground  in  mills.  The  sap  is 
pressed  out  by  rollers.  Then  it 


is  boiled  to  drive  away  the  water. 
Molasses  and  sugar  are  left.  The 
sugar  is  then  separated  from  the 
molasses.  Most  of  the  sugar  of 
the  Philippines  is  made  in  Luzon, 
Panay,  and  Negros. 


Tobacco 


Tobacco,  like  corn,  was  brought 
from  Mexico.  The  leaves  are 
picked  when  ripe,  and  dried  in 
the  sun,  or  in  a  house.  Then 
they  are  made  into  cigars  and 
cigarettes.  Most  of  the  to- 
bacco grows  in  northern  Lu- 
zon, and  is  sent  to  Manila. 
A  great  deal  of  tobacco  and 
many  cigars  and  cigarettes 
are  sent  from  the  Philippines 
to  China,  Spain,  and  other 
countries. 

Coconuts.  —  Many  valu- 
able products  come  from  the 
coconut  palm.  The  dried 
meat  of  the  coconut  is  called 
copra.  The  meat  of  the  nut  is 
dried  in  the  sun  or  over  slow 
fires  made  in  holes  in  the  ground. 
Oil  is  obtained  from  the  copra  by 
heating  and  pressing  it.  Coconut 


32 


PHILIPPINE   GEOGRAPHY  PRIMER 


oil  is  burned  in  lamps,  is  used  in 
cooking,  in  dressing  the  hair, 
and  in  the  manufacture  of  soap. 
Copra  is  the  second  largest 
export 1  of  the  Philippines. 
Much  of  the  copra  is  sent  to 
France.  There  the  oil  is  pressed 
out  and  used  to  make  soap,  can- 
dles, and  butter.  Some  of  these 
things  are  sent  back  to  the 
Philippines  and  sold  here.  Why 
are  they  not  made  in  the  Philip- 
pines ? 


Stripping  hemp 

Fiber  Plants.  —  Abaca,  or 
Manila  hemp,  is  the  most  valu- 
able of  the  fiber  plants  of  the 
Philippines.  Rope  and  cloth  are 

1  An  "  export "  is  something  sent  to 
another  coantry  to  be  sold. 


made  from  it.  Abaca  grows  in 
the  Philippines  better  than  in 
any  other  part  of  the  world. 
Hemp  forms  more  than  one  half 
of  the  total  exports  of  the  Philip- 
pines. 

Maguey  is  another  fiber  plant 
of  value.  Most  of  the  maguey 
is  raised  in  northern  Luzon. 

Cotton  grows  well  in  many 
parts  of  the  islands,  but  very 
little  is  raised.  Most  of  the  cot- 
ton cloth  used  in  the  Philippines 
comes  from  other  countries. 
Why? 

The  pineapple  gives  the  fiber 
from  which  piTia  cloth  is  made. 
Most  of  this  fiber  is  produced  in 
the  Visayas.  From  the  leaves  of 
the  burl  palm  hats  and  mats  are- 
woven.  From  the  nipa  palm 
mats,  sails,  and  thatch  are  made. 

Fruits. --The  banana,  mango, 
guava,  and  chico  are  the  most 
common  Philippine  fruits.  Most 
of  these  grow  in  all  parts  of  the 
Philippines.  Make  a  list  of  the 
different  fruits  that  grow  near 
your  town. 

Vegetables.  —  Many  kinds  of 
vegetables  grow  in  the  Philip- 
pines. The  camote,  ubi,  sinkamas, 
and  gabi  are  common.  Euro- 
pean and  American  vegetables 
are  grown,  but  they  are  smaller 
in  size  and  poorer  in  quality 
than  in  their  home  countries. 


THE   PHILIPPINE   ISLANDS 


33 


Other  Products.  —  Coffee  and 
cacao  are  valuable  plants.  Grutta- 
percha  is  an  important  product. 
It  is  obtained  from  the  trunks 
and  branches  of  certain  trees. 
Rubber  is  a  product  much  like 
gutta-percha.  It  is  obtained 
from  the  sap  of  trees  and  vines. 

Woods.  —  In  the  great  forests 
of  the  Philippines  there  are 
nearly  one  thousand  different 
kinds  of  trees.  About  one  hun- 
dred kinds  of  these  trees  give 
lumber  valuable  for  building. 

The  antipole  and  the  molave 
are  much  used  for  building  ships 
and  wharves.  There  are  little 
animals  in  the  sea  that  eat  wood. 
They  do  not  like  the  antipolo 
and  the  molave,  so  these  woods 
last  a  long  time  in  the  sea. 

Narra  is  a  beautiful  wood  for 
furniture,  and  guijo  is  a  useful 
building  wood. 

Sometimes  Filipinos,  when 
they  wish  to  clear  the  ground 
for  planting,  burn  down  valu- 
able trees.  It  is  wasteful  and 
foolish  to  do  this,  because  such 
trees  will  be  worth  a  great  deal 
of  money  in  the  future. 

There  are  many  useful  plants 
in  the  Philippines.  Abaca  is  the 
most  valuable  fiber  plant.  There 
are  many  valuable  building 
woods. 


TABLE  OF  THE  CHIEF   CROPS  OF   THE 
PHILIPPINES 


Islands  pro- 

Islands produc- 

Islands     pro- 

ducing the 

ing  the  Second 

ducing       the 

Largest 

Largest 

Third  Largest 

Amounts. 

Amounts. 

Amounts. 

Rice 

Luzon 

Pan  ay 

Negros 

Abaca 

Luzon 

Leyte 

Mindanao 

Copra 

Luzon 

Mindanao 

Leyte 

Sugar 

Negros 

Luzon 

Cebii 

Tobacco 

Luzon 

Cebii 

Negros 

Corn 

Luzon 

Cebii 

Negros 

Cotton 

Luzon 

Negros 

Cebii 

Cacao 

Luzon 

Cebii 

Mindanao 

Sawing  lumber 

Helps.  —  From  what  country  was 
corn  brought  here?  Is  it  easier  to 
raise  corn  or  rice  ?  In  which  islands 
does  most  of  the  corn  grow?  For 
what  is  corn  useful  ?  Does  corn  need 
much  or  little  water  ? 

Name  eight  of  the  principal  crops 
of  the  Philippines.  Which  island 
grows  the  most  sugar-cane?  Name 
the  three  islands  that  produce  the 
most  rice.  The  three  that  produce 
the  most  hemp.  The  most  copra. 
Tobacco.  Cotton.  Corn.  Cacao. 

From  what  is  sugar  made  in  the 
Philippines  ?  In  what  islands  is 
most  of  the  sugar  made  ?  From  what 
country  was  tobacco  brought  ?  Where 
is  most  of  the  tobacco  raised?  To 


34 


PHILIPPINE   GEOGKAPHY   PKIMER 


what  countries  is  most  of  the  tobacco 
sent  ?  Where  is  most  of  it  manufac- 
tured into  cigars  and  cigarettes  ? 

From  what  is  copra  made?  How 
is  it  made  ?  Where  is  most  of  it  sent? 
How  is  coconut  oil  made  ?  For  what 
is  it  used?  What  besides  copra  and 
oil  do  we  get  from  the  coconut  palm  ? 

Which  is  the  best  Philippine  fiber 
plant?  What  is  made  from  its 
fiber  ?  How  much  of  the  exports 
of  the  Philippines  is  abaca  fiber  ? 
Name  some  other  fiber  plants. 
Why  is  so  little  cotton  raised? 
Name  'four  things  made  from  the 
nipa  palm. 

Name  the  four  most  common 
fruits.  How  many  good  building 
woods  are  in  the  forests  ?  Name 
four  of  them.  Why  is  it  unwise 
to  burn  trees  to  clear  land  ? 

Spell.  —  Abaca,  fiber,  antipolo, 
molave,     narra,     guijo,     export,     ma- 
guey. 

3.  Animals,  Metals,  and  Minerals 

Animals.  —  There  are  few 
large  wild  animals  in  the  Phil- 
ippines. In  ancient  times  the 
Filipinos  hunted  the  carabaos 
for  food.  The  king  of  Spain 
ordered  the  Filipinos  to  catch 
them  and  tame  them. 

In  the  island  of  Mindoro  there 
is  an  animal,  much  like  the  cara- 
bao,  called  the  timarau.  Its 
horns  are  shorter  and  straighter 
than  the  horns  of  the  carabao. 
A  small  bear  is  found  in  Pala- 
wan. Deer,  wild  pigs,  monkeys, 
and  very  large  snakes  are  found 
in  the  mountains  on  many 


islands,  and  crocodiles  live  in 
some  of  the  rivers.  Horses, 
goats,  sheep,  and  cattle  were 
brought  to  the  Philippines  by 
the  Spaniards. 

There   are  nearly  seven   hun- 
dred kinds  of  birds  in  the  islands. 


Fishing  rafts  and  lighthouse 

Fish.  —  There  are  many  fine 
fish  in  the  seas  around  the  Philip- 
pines. With  larger  boats  and 
better  nets  more  fish  could  be 
caught.  In  the  rivers  and  lakes 
of  Luzon  and  the  Visayas  there 
used  to  be  many  large  fish,  but 
now  there  are  only  a  few.  This 
is  because  the  people  do  not  yet 
understand  how  to  take  care  of 
the  fish.  When  they  catch  a 
small,  young  fish,  they  ought  to 
throw  it  back  into  the  water  in 
order  that  it  may  grow  large  and 
lay  many  eggs.  One  ought  to 
catch  only  the  larger  fish,  or  fish 
will  become  fewer  and  fewer. 

Metals  and  Minerals. —  Gold, 
copper,  and  iron  are  metals. 


THE   PHILIPPINE   ISLANDS 


35 


Coal,  salt,  and  petroleum  are  min- 
erals. There  are  many  valuable 
metals  and  minerals  in  the  moun- 
tains of  the  Philippines. 

Most  of  the  gold  is  found  in 
the  mountains  of  Luzon,  in 
Masbate,  and  in  northern  Min- 
danao. Copper  is  found  in  Luzon 
and  other  islands.  Iron  is  found 
in  Luzon,  lead  in  Mindoro,  and 
coal  in  many  of  the  islands.  The 
best  Philippine  coal  is  found 
in  the  islands  of  Polillo  and  Ba- 
tdn.  Polillo  island  belongs  to 
Tayabas  province ;  Batan  be- 
longs to  Albay  province.  Pe- 
troleum is  found  in  Tayabas 
province  and  in  Cebu. 

There  is  much  fine  build- 
ing stone  in  the  islands. 
Mortars  for  pounding  rice, 
rollers  for  grinding  sugarcane, 
and  blocks  for  building  walls, 
houses,  bridges,  and  roads, 
are  cut  from  the  solid  rock. 

There,   are    many   valuable 
metals     and     minerals     in     the 
Philippines. 

Helps.  —  Which  is  the  largest  wild 
animal  in  the  Philippines?  Where  is 
it  found?  Which  wild  animal  is 
found  in  Palawan  ?  Name  other  kinds 
of  wild  animals.  What  lives  in  the 
rivers?  Name  four  kinds  of  animals 
brought  here  by  the  Spaniards.  How 
many  kinds  of  birds  are  there  in  the 
Philippines?  Why  are  there  few 
large  fish  in  the  rivers  and  lakes? 

Name   three   metals   found    in    the 


islands.  Three  minerals.  Name  the 
parts  of  the  Philippines  where  the 
most  gold  is  found.  Where  the  most 
copper  is  found.  The  most  iron. 
The  most  lead.  Name  three  things 
made  from  stone.  Is  there  much 
building  stone  in  the  Philippines  ? 

Spell.  —  Timarau,  crocodile,  mineral, 
petroleum,  mortar,  Polillo. 

4.  Peoples 

Not  all  Filipinos  are  alike. 
Those  who  have  the  same  lan- 
guage and  customs  form  a  tribe. 
There  are  about  twenty-four 
tribes  in  the  islands. 


Negritos 

The  Negritos. —  The  Negritos 
were  probably  the  first  people 
who  lived  in  the  Philippines. 
They  are  small,  with  woolly  hair, 
flat  noses,  and  very  dark  skins. 
They  wear  little  clothing,  and 
wander  from  place  to  place. 
Look  at  the  pictures  of  the  Ne- 
gritos. How  do  they  differ  from 
the  Filipinos  that  you  have  seen? 

.The     Negritos     are     savages. 


36 


PHILIPPINE    GEOGEAPHY   PRIMES, 


They  have  the  poorest  kind  of 
houses  and  tools  and  are  very 
ignorant.  They  eat  fruits  and 
roots.  They  hunt  deer  and  pigs. 
There  are  about  twenty-five  thou- 
sand Negritos  in  the  Philippines. 
Most  of  them  live  in  Luzon, 
Negro s,  Panay,  and  Mindanao. 

The  Malayan  Filipinos. —  Most 
Filipinos  belong  to  the  Malayan, 
or  brown,  race.  There  are  many 
different  Malayan  peoples  in  the 
Philippines.  They  are  divided 
into  three  groups  —  the  Chris- 
tians, the  Moros,  and  the  Pagans, 
or  wild  tribes. 

The  Christian  Filipinos  live 
chiefly  in  Luzon  and  in  the  Visa- 
yas.  They  speak  different  dia- 
lects. There  are  eight  groups : 
Visayans,  Tagalogs,  Ilocanos, 
Bicols,  Pangasindns,  Pampan- 
gans,  Cagayans,  and  Zambals. 

The  most  numerous  of  these 
peoples  are  the  Yisayans.  They 
live  in  the  central  islands,  and 
in  northern  Mindanao. 

The  Tagalogs  number  about 
one  fifth  of  all  Filipinos.  They 
live  in  central  and  southern 
Luzon. 

The  Ilocanos  number  nearly  a 
million.  They  live  mainly  on 
the  northwest  coast  of  Luzon. 

There  are  more  than  half  a 
million  Bicols.  The  Bicols  live 
in  southern  Luzon. 


The  Pangasinans  and  Pam- 
pangans  live  in  the  provinces 
which  bear  their  names. 

The  Cagayans  live  in  the 
Cagayan  valley,  and  the  Zam- 
bals in  Zambales. 


Copyright,  1906,  by  C.  "W.  Hodgson. 
Bagobos,  a  tribe  of  Mindanao 

Of  the  nearly  eight  million 
people  who  live  in  the  Philip- 
pines, about  seven  million  belong 
to  the  eight  Christian  peoples. 
These  peoples  have  most  of  the 
knowledge,  wealth,  and  power  in 
the  Philippines. 

The  Moros  number  more  than 
a  quarter  of  a  million.  Some  are 
civilized,  but  many  are  half  wild. 
They  live  in  Mindanao,  the  Sulu 
Archipelago,  and  Palawan. 
They  speak  different  dialects, 
but  have  the  same  religion. 


THE   PHILIPPINE   ISLANDS 


37 


This  religion  is  Mahomet anism. 
The  Mahometans  believe  there 
is  only  one  God.  They  think 
Mahomet  spoke  for  God. 

Tlw  Pagan,  or  Wild,  Tribes. — 
There  are  fourteen  wild  Malayan 
tribes  living  in  the  mountains. 
They  number  about  four  hundred 
thousand  people.  Most  of  them, 
live  in  Luzon  and  Mindanao. 
These  tribes  speak  different  dia- 
lects, and  differ  in  dress,  customs 
and  religion.  Many  of  them  are 
savages,  but  some  are  indus- 
trious and  peaceable. 

THE  FOURTEEN  WILD  TRIBES  OF  THE 
PHILIPPINES 

Name  Where  found 

Igorots  Northern  Luzon 

Ilongots  Northeast  Luzon 

Mangyans  Mindoro 

Bukidnons  Luzon  and  Visayas 

Bataks  Palawan 

Tagbanuas  Palawan 

Subanos  Western  Mindanao 

Bilans  Southern  Mindanao 

Tagabilis  Southern  Mindanao 

Tirurays  Southern  Mindanao 

Manobos  Eastern  Mindanao 

Mandayas  Eastern  Mindanao 

Bagobos  Eastern  Mindanao 

Aetas  Eastern  Mindanao 

Foreigners. —  A  foreigner  is  a 
man  who  was  not  born  in  the 
country  where  he  lives,  but  who 
has  come  from  another  country. 
Most  of  the  foreigners  in  the 
Philippines  are  Chinese. 

Besides  the  American  soldiers, 
there  are  eight  thousand  other 


Americans  in  the  Philippines. 
Most  of  them  work  for  the 
government.  There  are  a  few 
thousand  Spaniards  who  are 
merchants  and  farmers,  some 
English,  French,  and  Germans, 
many  Japanese,  and  a  few  other 
foreigners. 

Many  different  peoples  live  in 
the  Philippines.  Most  of  them 
are  Malayans.  Most  of  the  Fili- 
pinos are  Christian  and  civilized. 
There  are  wild  tribes.  Foreigners 
from  many  countries  live  here. 

Helps.  —  What  is  a  tribe?  How 
many  tribes  live  in  the  Philippines  ? 

Who  were  the  first  people  to  live  in 
the  Philippines?  Describe  the  Ne- 
gritos. What  kind  of  houses  have 
they?  What  do  they  eat?  How 
many  Negritos  are  in  the  Philippines? 
Where  do  most  of  them  live  ? 

To  what  race  do  the  Filipinos  be- 
long ?  Into  what  three  divisions  may 
we  separate  the  Malay  Filipinos? 
Where  do  the  Christian  Filipinos  live  ? 
How  many  Christian  peoples  are  there  ? 
Name  them.  Which  is  the  most 
numerous?  Where  do  the  Visayans 
live  ?  The  Tagalogs  ?  The  Ilocanos  ? 
The  Bicols?  The  Pangasinans? 
The  Pampangans  ?  The  Cagayans  ? 
The  Zambals  ?  How  many  people  are 
there  in  the  Philippines  ?  How  many 
of  these  are  Christians  ?  Where  do  the 
Moros  live?  Where  do  most  of  the 
wild  tribes  live  ?  What  is  a  foreigner  ? 

Spell.  —  Negritos,  Visayans,  Taga- 
logs, Ilocanos,  Bicols,  Pangasinaus, 
Pampangans,  Cagayans,  Zambals,  for- 
eigners, Spaniards,  Japanese. 


38 


PHILIPPINE   GEOGRAPHY   PEIMER 


5.  Government 

The  Philippine  Islands  belong 
to  the  United  States  of  America. 
The  Governor  General  of  the  Phil- 
ippines is  chosen  by  the  President 
and  Senate  of  the  United  States. 


A  government  building  in  Manila 

The  Philippine,  Commission 
is  the  body  of  men  which  makes 
most  of  the  laws  for  the  Philip- 
pines. There  are  five  Ameri- 
can and  three  Filipino 
commissioners.  The 
President  and  Senate  of 
the  United  States  choose 
the  commissioners. 

There  are  thirty-eight 
provinces.  Each  province 
has  a  governor.  In  most  prov- 
inces the  people  of  the  province 
choose  their  governor.  Nearly 
all  the  governors  are  Filipinos. 

The  provincial  governor,  the 
provincial  treasurer,  and  the  divi- 
sion superintendent  of  schools 
form  the  provincial  hoard.  Such 
a  board  governs  most  provinces. 

The  provinces  are  divided  into 


municipalities.  Each  municipal- 
ity has  a  president  elected  by  the 
people  of  the  town. 

Manila  is  the  capital  of  the 
Philippine  Islands.  Manila  is 
not  in  a  province,  but  has  a  gov- 
ernment of  its  own.  Each  prov- 
ince has  a  capital  where  the 
governor  of  the  province  lives. 

TJie  Philippine  Islands  belong 
to  the  United  States  of  America. 
They  are  ruled  by  a  governor  gen- 
eral and  a  commission,  both  chosen 
by  the  President  and  Senate  of  the 
United  States.  There  are  thirty- 
eight  provinces,  and  the  capital, 
Manila.  Each  province  has  a 
capital  and  a  governor. 

Helps. — To  what  country  do  the 
Philippines  belong?  Who  appoints  the 


A  bridge  across  the  Pasig  River  at  Manila 

governor  general  ?  Who  make  laws  for 
the  Philippines  ?  How  many  commis- 
sioners are  there  ?  How  many  of  them 
are  Filipinos  ?  Who  appoints  the 
commissioners?  How  many  provinces 
are  there  ?  What  is  the  chief  of  a 
province  called?  Who  elect  him? 
What  is  the  head  of  a  town  called  ? 
Who  elect  him  ?  Who  form  the  provin- 
cial board?  What  does  this  board  do  ? 


Spell.  —  Commission, 
president,  provincial. 


municipality, 


THE   PHILIPPINE   ISLANDS 


39 


II.    Description  of  the  Islands 

and  Provinces 
1.  The  Luzon  Group 

Luzon.  Surface.  —  There  are 
about  three  hundred  islands  in 
the  Luzon  group.  The  largest  is 
Luzon  (area  40,969  sq.  m.  or 
106,195  sq.  km). 

Most  of  Northern  Luzon  is 
high  above  the  sea.  Three  moun- 
tain ranges  divide  it  into  valleys 
and  coastal  plains.1  (See  the 
maps  on  page  41  and  page  29.) 

Name  the  three  mountain 
ranges  of  northern  Luzon. 

Central  Luzon  lies  between 
the  mountains  of  northern  Luzon 
and  Manila  bay  and  Lake  Bay2 
on  the  south.  A  great  plain 
stretches  south  and  west  from  the 
G-ulf  of  Lingayen  to  Manila  bay. 
To  the  east  of  this  plain  rise  the 
mountains  of  the  Sierra  Madre 
range;  to  the  west  those  of 
Zambales.  The  Cardballo  Sur 
mountains  separate  northern 
Luzon  from  central  Luzon. 

Most  of  central  Luzon  is 
formed  of  several  large  river  val- 
leys with  very  gentle  slopes.  Not 
many  forests  are  on  the  great 
central  plain. 

Southern  Luzon  lies  south  of 
Lake  Bay  and  Manila  bay.  It 

1 A  coastal  plain  is  a  plain  bordering  on 
the  sea. 

2  Bay  as  used  here  is  not  an  English 
word,  but  the  Filipino  name  of  the  lake. 
It  is  pronounced  bai. 


is  a  land  of  many  short  moun- 
tain ranges  and  broken  highlands. 
There  are  no  large  plains.  Mayon 
and  Taal,  the  two  most  famous 
volcanoes  of  Luzon,  are  here. 


Copyright,  1906,  by  C.  W.  Hodgson. 
In  the  mountains  of  northern  Luzon 

People.  —  More  than  one  half 
of  all  the  people  of  the  Philip- 
pines live  on  Luzon.  All  the 
Christian  peoples,  except  the 
Yisayans,  live  here.  Twenty- 
three  of  the  thirty-eight  prov- 
inces of  the  Philippines  are  on 
Luzon.  These  provinces  we 
may  divide  into  six  groups.  The 
provinces  that  are  most  alike  in 
surface,  products,  and  people 
form  a  group. 

TJtere  are  many  mountains  and 
forests  on  Luzon.  The  coast  is 
irregular.  Half  the  people  and 
much  of  the  icealth  of  the  Phil- 
ippines are  on  Luzon. 

Helps. — How  many  islands  are  there 
in  the  Luzon  group?  Describe  the 
surface  of  Northern  Luz<5n.  Of  Cen- 
tral Luzdn.  Of  Southern  Luzdn. 
What  part  of  the  Filipino  people  live 


40 


PHILIPPINE   GEOGRAPHY   PRIMER 


on  Luzon?  How  many  of  the  Chris- 
tian peoples  live  on  Luzdn?  How 
many  provinces  in  Luzon  ?  What  prov- 
inces do  we  put  in  the  same  group  ? 

Spell.  —  Lingayen,    Sierra    Madre, 
Caraballo,  describe. 

The    Cagayan    Valley    Provinces 

The  Cagayan  river  is  the  larg- 
est in  Luzon.  It  flows  in  a  wind- 
ing course  through  a  broad, 
fertile  valley.  In  its  basin  lie 
three  provinces  :  Cagayan,  Isa- 
, Nueva  Vizcaya.  Each  year 


A  bouse  in  the  mountains  of  Nueva  Vizcaya 

the  floods  of  the  Cagayan  spread 
fertile  mud  over  the  fields  near  its 
banks.  The  Cagayan  valley  pro- 
duces most  of  the  tobacco  of  the 
Philippines. 

Cagayan  Province  produces 
much  corn,  but  very  little  rice. 
Alcohol  is  made  from  the  nipa 
palm.  Much  salt  is  made  and 
many  mats  are  woven  in  this 
province.  Most  of  the  people 
are  Cagayans.  Many  Ilocanos 
live  in  the  towns  along  the  river. 
Wild  tribes  live  in  the  mountains 
on  both  sides  of  the  valley.  Tu- 


guegarao    is    the    capital     city. 
Aparri  is  the  chief  port. 

The  Batan  and  the  Babuyan 
islands,  north  of  Luzon,  belong  to 
Cagayan  province.  Here  cattle, 
horses,  and  pigs  are  raised.  The 
small,  rocky  island  of  Yami  is  the 
most  northern  island  of  the  Phil- 
ippine group. 

Isabela  is  much  like  Cagayan  in 
products  and  people.  The  finest 
kind  of  tobacco  grows  in  Isabela. 
Cacao  and  coffee  are  raised,  and 
in  the  forests  some  valuable  woods 
are  found.  Hag  an,  the  capital,  is 
halfway  up  the  Cagayan  river. 

Nueva  Vizcaya  is  nearly  sur- 
rounded by  mountains.  The  soil 
is  fertile,  but  only  a  small  part  is 
cultivated.  There  are  few  in- 
dustries and  little  commerce,  be- 
cause most  of  the  people  belong  to 
the  wild  tribes.  The  Christians 
of  the  province  are  Ilocanos. 
Eice  and  salt  are  the  chief  prod- 
ucts, and  some  tobacco,  sugar  and 
coffee  are  raised.  Bayombong,  the 
capital,  and  Solano  are  the  chief 
towns. 

The  provinces  of  the  Cagayan 
valley  are  fertile.  Tobacco  is  ihe 
principal  product.  There  are 
few  Christian  people,  but  many 
wild  tribes. 

Helps.  —  Which  is  the  largest  river 
of  Luzon?  How  does  it  enrich  the 


Kta.Maria  tie  Mayan 
ITBAYATI^J 


BATAN  ISLANDS 

BaSCCgjMf.lRRAYA 
anCarlo^ATANL 


BABUYAN    ISLANDS 

VOL. 

•>'DfcA8  R 
GUINAPAC  R 


LUZON 

AND 

NEIGHBORING  ISLANDS 


20      40      60       Ob     100    120    HO 


U.U.  POATES  ENGR'G  CO.,  N.r. 


PHILIPPINE   GEOGRAPHY  PRIMER 


land?  What  do  you  call  land  that 
lies  along  a  river  and  is  sometimes 
covered  by  water  (p.  5)  ?  What  prov- 
inces are  in  the  valley  of  the  Cagayan  ? 
What  is  the  chief  product  of  this  valley  ? 

What  are  the  chief  products  of 
Cagayan  province  ?  Towns  ?  What 
is  the  chief  people  ?  What  groups  of 
islands  belong  to  Cagayan  ?  Name 
some  products  of  these  islands.  Which 
island  is  farthest  north  ? 

Tell  about  the  people  of  Isabela. 
About  the  products.  About  the  capi- 
tal. Tell  about  the  land  of  Nueva 
Vizcaya.  About  the  products.  Peo- 
ple. Towns. 

Spell.  —  Tuguegarao,  Aparri,  Viz- 
caya, Ilagan,  Bayombong,  Solano, 
Babuyan,  Yami,  Cagayan. 


Copyright,  1906,  by  C.  W.  Hodgson. 
The  Cordillera  central  mountains  of  northern  Luzon 

The   Provinces   of    the    Northern 
Highland 

Much  of  northern  Luzdh  is  a 
plateau.1  This  plateau  is  much 
broken  by  mountains.  Lepanto- 
Bontoc,  Benyuet  and  Abra  occupy 
most  of  this  region.  A  part  of  each 
of  the  Cagayan  valley  prov- 
inces lies  in  this  plateau.  Near 
the  center  of  the  plateau  is 

1  "  Plateau  "  means  a  high  level  plain. 


Mount  Data,  a  lofty  mountain 
of  northern  Luzon.  From  this 
mountain  four  large  rivers  flow. 
Find  and  name  them. 

The  climate  of  these  provinces 
is  different  from  that  of  the  low- 
lands. On  cold  nights  in  winter 
the  people  keep  fires  burning  all 
night,  for  warmth. 


Igorots 

The  Igorots.  —  Nearly  half  of 
the  wild  people  of  the  Philippines 
live  in  these  provinces.  Most  of 
them  are  called  Igorots.  They  are 
divided  into  many  small  groups 
of  different  names.  The  Igorots 
are  short,  strong  people.  Most 
of  them  wear  their  hair  long  and 
have  few  clothes.  The  Igorots 
raise  camotes,  rice,  coffee,  and 
cattle.  From  the  great  pine  trees 
they  cut  boards  and  build  houses. 

Some  of  the  Igorots  are  very 
warlike.  These  warlike  ones  are 
called  head-hunters,  because  they 
cut  off  the  heads  of  their  enemies. 
They  do  this  as  part  of  their  re- 
ligion. The  Igorots  believe  that 


THE   PHILIPPINE   ISLANDS 


43 


there  are  many  gods  who  live  in 
the  trees  and  in  the  mountains. 

Baguio,  the  capital  of  Benguet 
jwovince,  is  nearly  a  mile  above 
the  sea.  Baguio  is  the  capital 
of  the  Philippines  in  the  hot 
months.  In  April  and  May  the 
governor  general  and  the  Com- 
mission live  there.  The  road 
through  the  mountains  to  Baguio 
follows  the  Bued  river. 


The  narrow  channel  of  the  Bued  river 

There  is  copper  and  gold  in 
Benguet.  Coffee  is  grown  and 
exported. 

Cervantes  is  the  capital  of 
Lepanto-Bontoc.  At  Mancayan 
are  copper  and  gold  mines.  Cof- 
fee is  raised  and  salt  is  manu- 
factured. 

Helps.  —  Name  the  provinces  of  the 
northern  plateau.  What  is  the  highest 
mountain  of  northern  Luzon  ?  De- 
scribe the  climate.  Tell  about  the  Igo- 
rots.  What  do  they  raise  ?  Tell  about 
their  religion.  Tell  about  Baguio. 
What  are  the  products  of  Benguet? 


What  is  the  capital  of  Lepanto-Bontoc  ? 
What  metals  are  mined  in  that  prov- 
ince ?  Name  two  other  products. 

Spell.  —  Benguet,  Lepanto-Bontoc, 
Igorot,  Baguio,  Cervantes,  Mancayan. 

The   Provinces  of  the  Northwest 
Coast 

The  long,  narrow  Ilocos  plain 
is  fertile  and  thickly  populated. 
Many  rivers  cross  it,  flowing  from 
the  Ilocos  range  into  the  China 
sea.  These  rivers  are  short  and 
swift,  and  wash  down  from  the 
mountains  the  rich  soil  that 
makes  the  country  so  fertile. 

The  three  provinces  of  Ilocos 
Norte,  Ilocos  Sur  and  Union 
occupy  this  coastal  plain.  The 
people  are  Ilocanos. 

Ilocos  Norte  is  the  greatest 
rice  producing  province  of  north- 
ern Luzon.  Maguey  is  one  of  the 
leading  products.  Maguey  fiber 
is  not  so  long  or  so  strong  as 
abaca  fiber,  but  it  is  valuable. 
Rope  and  twine  are  made  from 
maguey.  More  cotton  is  raised 
in  Ilocos  Norte  than  in  any  other 
province  of  Luzon.  Many  cotton 
blankets  and  towels  are  woven 
here.  In  the  northern  part  of 
the  province  cacao  and  rubber 
vines  grow  well.  Tobacco  is 
grown  and  exported. 

Laoag,  the  capital,  is  one  of  the 
largest  towns  in  Luzon.  Batac 
and  Dingras  are  also  important 
towns. 


44 


PHILIPPINE   GEOGRAPHY   PRIMER 


Ilocos  Sur  is  the  richest  of  the 
Ilocano  provinces.  Rice,  sugar, 
maguey,  cotton,  tobacco,  coco- 
nuts and  indigo  are  produced; 
and  horses  and  cattle  are  raised. 


The  church  tower  at  Laoag 

Vigan,  the  capital,  is  a  rich 
town  of  many  tine  houses.  Juan 
de  Salcedo,  who  conquered  most 
of  Luzon  for  the  Spaniards, settled 
here  in  1572.  Pottery,  bricks, 
salt,  carriages,  shoes,  saddles, 
cigars,  and  cigarettes  are  made 
in  and  near  Vigan.  There  are 
many  wood  carvers  and  silver- 
smiths. Candon  and  Narvacan 
are  large  towns. 

The  old  province  of  Abra  is 
now  a  sub-province  of  Ilocos  Sur. 
In  the  large  towns  of  Abra  the 
people  are  Ilocanos.  In  the 
mountainous  regions  are  many 
Tinguians  and  other  Igorots. 
Corn  and  tobacco  grow  well  in 
Abra,  and  many  horses  are 


raised.  Timber  is  floated  down 
to  Vigan  on  the  Abra  river. 
Bangued,  the  former  capital,  is  a 
beautiful  and  healthful  town. 

Union  is  the  third  province  in 
the  Islands  in  the  production  of 
tobacco.  Rice,  coconuts,  sugar, 
and  maguey  are  other  products. 
Cotton  cloth  and  pottery  are 
manufactured.  San  Fernando, 
the  capital,  has  the  best  harbor 
on  the  northwest  coast.  In  the 
mountains  of  Union  there  are 
many  Igorots.  Some  Pangasi- 
nans  live  in  the  southern  part. 

The  Ilocos  country  is  a  narrow, 
fertile,  coastal  plain.  Rice  and 
maguey  are  the  chief  products. 
The  people  are  industrious  and 
prosperous. 


Making  pottery 

Helps.  —  Describe  the  Ilocos  plain. 
How  many  provinces  are  there  in  this 
group  ?  Name  them  from  north  to 
south.  Who  are  the  people  ?  Name 
a  sub-province  of  Ilocos  Sur.  Which 
of  these  provinces  produces  the  most 
rice  ?  Name  five  other  products  of 
Ilocos  Norte.  What  is  the  capital  ? 


THE   PHILIPPINE   ISLANDS 


45 


Which  is  the  richest  of  the  Ilocano 
provinces  ?  Name  its  products.  De- 
scribe the  capital.  Who  settled  there 
in  1572?  Name  the  manufactures. 
Name  three  other  large  towns. 

Which  province  is  third  in  the 
amount  of  tobacco  raised  ?  Name  four 
other  products  of  Union.  Two  manu- 
factures. What  is  the  capital  ?  How 
is  it  situated  ?  What  three  peoples 
live  in  Union  ? 

Spell.  —  Maguey,  Laoag,  Dingras, 
Salcedo,  pottery,  carriages,  saddles, 
silversmiths,  Narvacan,  Tinguians, 
Bangued. 

The  Provinces  of  Central  Luzon 

Most  of  Pangasinan  is  a  fertile 
plain,  with  mountains  on  the 
east  and  west.  The  Agno,  the 
second  largest  river  in  Luzon, 
runs  through  Pangasinan.  Many 
nipa  palms  and  coconuts  grow 
along  the  coast.  Rice,  sugar- 
cane, and  tobacco  are  raised,  and 
much  rice  is  exported  to  other 
provinces. 

Nearly  one  third  of  all  the  rice 
raised  in  the  Philippines  is  grown 
in  Pangasinan.  There  is  some 
commerce  by  sea  with  the  north- 
west coast  of  Luzon.  Salt,  alco- 
hol, hats,  and  mats  are  impor- 
tant manufactures. 

This  province  is  the  home  of 
the  Pangasinans.  The  population, 
about  four  hundred  thousand, 
is  the  largest  of  any  province  of 
Luzon.  There  are  some  Negritos 
and  Igorots  in  the  mountains. 


Lingayen,  the  capital  of  the 
province,  and  Dagupan,  the  larg- 
est city  in  the  province,  are  built 
on  the  delta  of  the  Agno  river. 
The  railroad  from  Manila  ends 
at  Dagupan.  Calasiao,  San  Car- 
los, and  Bautista  are  other  im- 
portant towns. 


The  plaza  at  Lingayen 

Tarlac  Province  is  hilly  in  the 
west  and  level  in  the  east.  Rice, 
alcohol,  pottery,  timber,  and  sugar 
are  the  principal  products.  The 
people  are  mainly  Ilocanos,  Pam- 
pangans,  and  Pangasinans.  There 
are  some  Tagalogs  and  Zambals. 
In  the  mountains  are  many  Ne- 
gritos. 

Can  you  tell  why  so  many 
different  peoples  live  in  this 
province  ? 

Tarlac,  the  capital,  is  a  com- 
mercial town  on  the  railroad.  At 
Murcia  is  a  government  farm. 
On  this  farm  rice  fields  are  plowed 
by  a  great  steam  plow  which 
turns  six  deep  furrows  at  a  time. 
The  rice  is  planted,  cut,  threshed, 
and  hulled  by  machinery.  (See 
the  picture  on  page  46.) 


46 


PHILIPPINE   GEOGRAPHY   PRIMER 


Helps. —  Describe  the  surface  of  Pan- 
gasinan.  What  large  river  runs  through 


Threshing  rice  by  machinery 

this  province  ?  Name  the  agricultural 
products.  Manufactures.  People.  The 
provincial  capital.  Other  large  towns. 
Describe  the  surface  of  Tarlac  prov- 
ince. Name  the  principal  products. 
The  peoples.  The  capital.  Tell  about 
the  government  farm. 

Spell. —  Pangasinan,  Lingayen,  Cala- 
siao,  Bautista,  Zambals,  threshed, 
hulled,  machinery,  Murcia. 

The  Provinces  of  Central  Luzon 
—  Continued 

Pampanga,  except  the  moun- 
tainous western  part,  lies  in  the 
great  plain  of  central  Luzon. 
The  Pampanga  river,  which 
drains  the  province,  is  one  of  the 
largest  rivers  in  Luzon.  Through 
what  other  provinces  does  it  flow  ? 

Pampanga  is  the  second  prov- 
ince in  the  Philippines  in  the 
production  of  sugar.  Much  rice 
is  raised.  Alcohol  is  one  of  the 
chief  products.  Fishing  and  the 
weaving  of  pina  cloth  are  impor- 
tant industries. 

Most  of  the  people  are  Pam- 
pangans.  Besides  San  Fernando, 


the  capital,  Bacolor,  Angeles,  and 
Guagua  are  important  towns. 

Nueva  Ecija. — This  province  is 
mountainous  in  the  north  and  east, 
and  nearly  level  in  the  west  and 
south.  The  chief  crops  are  rice, 
sugar,  corn,  and  hemp.  Some 
timber  is  cut  in  the  mountains. 

Most  of  the  people  are  Taga- 
logs,  but  there  are  also  many 
Ilocanos. 

San  Isidro,  the  capital,  is  on 
the  railroad.  Gapdn  and  Cuyapo 
are  large  towns. 


Rice  stacks  in  Pampanga 

Bulacan  is  mountainous  in  the 
east.  The  rest  of  the  province 
is  a  plain,  drained  chiefly  by  the 
Angat  and  Pampanga  rivers. 
Bulacan  is  called  the  u  Garden  of 
Luzon."  The  land  produces  rice, 
sugar,  fruits,  and  timber.  There 
are  many  nipa  swamps.  More 
than  half  of  all  the  alcohol  made 
in  Luzon  is  manufactured  in  the 
province  of  Bulacan. 

At  Angat  are  famous  iron 
mines.  The  manufacture  of  cloth, 
cigars,  and  cigarettes  are  impor- 
tant industries  in  the  towns  of 


THE   PHILIPPINE   ISLANDS 


47 


Bulacdn,  Hagonoy,  and  Baliuag. 
The  hats  of  Baliuag  are  famous. 
Malolos  is  the  capital.  The  people 
of  Bulacan  are  nearly  all  Taga- 
logs. 

The  provinces  of  the  central 
plain  of  Luzon  have  many  people. 
Rice,  sugar,  and  alcohol  are  the 
chief  products. 

Helps.  —  Describe  the  surface  of 
Pampanga.  What  rivers  drain  Pam- 
panga?  What  are  the  chief  products 
of  Pampanga  ?  To  what  tribes  do  the 
people  belong?  Name  the  larger  towns. 
The  capital. 

Describe  the  surface  of  Nueva  Ecija. 
What  are  its  chief  crops?  Who  are 


the     tow  n  s. 
The  capital. 

D  escribe 
the  surface  of 
Bulacan. 
What  is  the 
chief  river  ? 
What  is  found 
at  Angat  ? 
What  are  the 
chief  agricul- 

Making  a  banca  in  the  forests  ,  , 

ofzambaies  tural    prod- 

ucts  ?     Manu- 

factures?    What  are  the  chief  towns? 
What  city  is  the  capital  ? 

Spell.  —  Pampanga,  Bacolor,  Ange- 
les, Gruagua,  Ecija,  Isidro,  Baliuag. 

The  Western  Provinces  of  Central 
Luzon 

Zambales  and  Bataan  provinces 
have  narrow  coastal  plains  and 
steep  mountains.  There  are 


heavy  forests  from  which  some 
timber  is  shipped  to  Manila. 

Subic  bay  is  an  important  har- 
bor. Olongapo  is  a  United  States 
naval  station.  2ba,  the  capital  of 
Zambales,  is  an  important  town. 
Many  Ilocanos,  Zambals,  and  some 
Pangasinans  live  in  this  province. 
There  are  many  Negritos  in  the 
mountains.  Rice,  sugar-cane,  and 
tobacco  are  raised  in  Zambales. 
The  fisheries  are  important. 

At  Mariveles,  in  Bataan  prov- 
ince, are  the  largest  stone  quar- 
ries in  the  islands.  The  people 
of  Bataan  raise  rice,  sugar-cane, 
cotton,  indigo,  and  vegetables. 
Tagalogs  and  Negritos  live  in  this 
province.  Balatiga  is  the  capital. 


Making  salt  in  Cavite  province 

Cavite. — The  land  slopes  north- 
ward from  the  mountains  to  Ma- 
nila bay,  and  eastward  to  Bay 
Lake.  Some  hemp  -and  coffee 
are  raised  on  the  hillsides.  On 
the  lowlands,  sugar-cane,  rice,  and 
fruits  are  raised.  Fishing  and 
salt  making  are  common  occupa- 
tions on  the  coast.  There  is  some 
weaving  of  cotton  and  hemp. 


48 


PHILIPPINE   GEOGRAPHY   PKIMEB, 


At  Cavite,  the  capital,  is  a 
United  States  naval  station. 
Imus  and  San  Francisco  are  large 
towns.  The  people  of  Cavite  are 
Tagalogs. 


A  view  of  Cavite 

Cavite  province  is  famous  in 
Philippine  history.  Many  battles 
were  fought  in  this  province  be- 
tween the  Filipinos  and  the  Span- 
iards. Near  the  town  of  Cavite 
the  American  fleet,  under  Admi- 
ral Dewey,  destroyed  the  Spanish 
war  ships  in  1898. 

Helps.  —  Describe  the  surfaces  of 
Zambales  and  Bataan.  What  province 
is  located  at  Olongapo?  What  is  the 
capital  of  Zambales?  To  what  tribe 
do  the  people  belong  ?  What  are  the 
products  ?  What  is  found  at  Mari- 
veles  ?  What  are  the  products  of 
Bataan  ?  Who  are  the  people  ?  What 
city  is  the  capital  ? 

Describe  the  surface  of  Cavite. 
What  are  the  products  of  the  high- 
lands ?  Of  the  lowlands  ?  What  are 
the  industries  on  the  coast  ?  What  is 
the  capital?  Name  two  other  large 
towns.  Tell  why  Cavite  is  famous  in 
history. 

Spell.  —  Zambales,  Bataan,  Subic, 
Balanga,  Imus,  Spanish. 


The  Lake  Provinces 
Rizal  is  mountainous  in  the 
east,  and  nearly  level  in  the  west. 
This  province  incloses  the  city 
of  Manila  on  the  land  side.  It 
carries  on  a  large  trade  with  Ma- 
nila in  timber,  bamboo,  fruits, 
coconut  oil,  alcohol,  lime,  and 
areca  nuts,  which  are  sent  down 
the  Pasig  river.  Rizal  has  many 
stone  quarries. 

A  railroad  runs  up  the  north 
bank. of  the  Pasig  river  to  the 
capital,  Pasig.  Malabon,  the 
largest  town  in  the  province,  has 
many  cigar  factories  and  a  sugar 
refinery,  where  the  coarse,  brown 
sugar  is  made  clean,  fine,  and 
white.  The 
people  of  Eizal 
are  Tagalogs, 
except  a  few 
Negritos  in  the 
mountains. 

La  Laguna. 
— The  land  is 
low  and  fertile 
near  the  lake. 
On  the  north, 
south,  and  east 
are  lofty  moun- 
tains.  Mt. 
Banajao  (2250 
meters  or  7382  feet)  is  the  highest 
mountain  of  central  Luzon.  Near 
Majayjay  are  the  Botocdn  Falls, 
the  highest  in  the  Philippines. 


Botocan  Falls 


THE   PHILIPPINE   ISLANDS 


49 


On  the  lake  shore  are  most 
of  the  large  towns.  From  them 
great  quantities  of  fruit  and 
vegetables  are  sent  to  Manila 
by  steamers.  On  the  west  shore 
of  the  lake  is  Colombo,,  where 
Jose  Rizal  was  born.  Los  Ba- 
nos  is  noted  for  its  hot  springs, 
whose  waters  heal  diseases.  In 
the  eastern  part  of  the  province 
are  Santa  Cruz,  the  capital,  Pag- 
sanjdn,  noted  for  its  fine  water- 
falls, and  Paete,  famous  for  its 
wood-carvers. 


Coconut  rafts  at  Pagsanjan 

There  are  large  coconut  groves 
in  La  Laguna,  containing  about 
3,000,000  full-grown  trees.  Co- 
pra and  coconut  oil  are  the  chief 
products.  Much  tuba  is  also  pro- 
duced. The  people  are  Tagalogs. 

Helps.  —  Describe  the  surface  of 
Kizal.  What  is  sent  to  Manila? 
Where  is  the  railroad  ?  Name  the 
chief  towns.  The  capital.  What 
people  live  in  Eizal  ?  What  is  a 
sugar  refinery  ? 

Describe  the  surface  of  La  Laguna 
province.  What  is  the  highest  moun- 
tain ?  What  famous  waterfall  is  in 
this  province?  What  towns  are  on 
the  west  shore  of  the  lake  ?  On  the 
east  shore  ?  In  what  town  was  Jose 


Eizal  born  ?  What  town  is  noted  for 
its  hot  springs?  What  town  is  the 
capital  ?  What  are  the  chief  prod- 
ucts ?  To  what  tribe  do  the  people 
belong  ? 

Spell.  —  Quarries,     areca,    refinery, 
Banajao,  Botocan,  Pagsanjan,  Paete. 

The  City  of  Manila 

Manila,  the  capital  of  the 
Philippine  Islands,  is  the  only 
city  of  the  Philippines  that  is 
known  all  over  the  world.  It 
is  the  largest  city  in  the  is- 
lands. There  are  about  230,000 
people  in  Manila,  most  of 
whom  are  Tagalogs.  There 
are  also  in  Manila  Filipinos 
from  many  other  parts  of 
the  islands,  and  many  for- 
eigners. 

Manila  is  built  on  the  Bay 
of  Manila,  at  the  mouth  of 
the  Pasig  river,  on  both  banks. 
The  land  is  low  and  flat,  and  not 
a  healthful  location  for  a  great 
city.  Yet  Manila  has  grown  to 
be  a  great  city,  because  the  com- 
merce of  the  great  plain  of  cen- 


A  railroad  train 


tral    Luzon    reaches   it   by   the 
railroads,  by  the  Pampanga  river 


50 


PHILIPPINE   GEOGRAPHY   PRIMER 


Copyright,  1903,  by  D.  Encinas. 


View  in  Manila,  looking  east  from  the  cathedral 


and  Manila  bay,   and  by    Lake 
Bay  and  the  Pasig  river. 


A  scene  on  the  Pasig  river 

Manila  has  hundreds  of  snops 
and  factories,  fine  business 
buildings,  and  many  beautiful 
churches.  The  palace'  of  the 
governor  general,  the  treasury, 
where  the  money  of  the  govern- 
ment is  kept,  and  other  great 
government  buildings  are  here. 
In  these  buildings  thousands  of 
rnen  do  the  work  of  the  Philip- 
pine government. 

Carriages  in  great  numbers 
and  electric  cars  are  seen  in  the 
streets  of  Manila,  and  in  the  city 
are  parks  and  gardens  where 
people  can  walk,  drive,  or  rest. 

Manila  is  the  center  of  trade 
for  the  whole  archipelago,  and 


receives  hemp,  sugar,  and  to- 
bacco from  hundreds  of  smaller 
ports.  From  Manila  these  prod- 
ucts are  sent  to  foreign  coun- 
tries. Out  in  the  harbor  one 
can  always  see  ships  from 
different  parts  of  the  world. 

Great  walls  of  stone,  called 
breakwaters,  have  been  built  in 
the  bay  to  protect  the  ships 
from  the  waves,  and  make  the 
harbor  safe  in  times  of  storm. 


Electric  car  in  Manila 

The  industries  of  Manila  are 
many  and  varied.  There  are 
sawmills  which  cut  the  timber 
of  the  provinces  into  lumber, 
and  factories  where  some  of  this 
lumber  is  made  into  furniture. 


THE   PHILIPPINE   ISLANDS 


51 


There  are  cigar  and  cigarette 
factories,  and  many  other  fac- 
tories, where  carriages,  ropes, 
machinery,  shoes,  matches,  ice, 


The  ice  factory  at  Manila 

alcohol,  buttons,  and  other  things 
are  made.  Manila  has  many 
newspapers  and  publishes  many 
books.  Railroads  run  from  Ma- 
nila to  different  parts  of  Luzon, 
and  the  telegraph  connects  it 
with  all  the  great  cities  of  the 
world.  Every  Filipino  should 
visit  Manila. 

History.  —  The  Spaniards  con- 
quered Manila  in  1570.  Le- 
gazpi,  the  first  Spanish  governor 
of  the  Philippines,  settled  in  the 
city  in  1571.  The  Chinese  at- 
tacked the  city  in  1574,  but 
were  driven  away.  The  British 
took  it  in  1762,  but  soon  gave  it 
back  to  Spain.  The  Americans 
captured  Manila  in  1898.  It  is 
now  one  of  the  best-governed 
cities  in  the  world,  and  one  of 
the  finest  cities  in  the  Orient.1 

1Asia  and  Africa,  with  the  islands  near 
them,  are  often  called  the  "  Orient." 


Manila  is  rich  and  great.  It 
has  much  commerce  and  many 
manufactures.  Every  Filipino 
should  visit  Manila. 

Helps.  —  How  many  people  live  in 
Manila?  Who  are  they?  Why  has 
Manila  become  great  ?  Find  on  the 
map  the  provinces  whose  goods  can 
reach  Manila  easily  by  water.  What 
are  some  of  the  great  buildings  ?  How 
do  people  travel  through  the  streets  ? 
What  are  the  chief  products  brought 
to  Manila?  Where  are  these  things 
se-nt  from  Manila?  Name  the  chief 
manufactures?  Who  conquered  Ma- 
nila in  1570?  In  1762?  In  1898? 
How  does  it  now  compare  with  other 
cities  ? 

Spell. — Electric,  telegraph,  churches, 
treasury. 


Making  baskets  in  Manila 

The  Provinces  of  Southern  Luzon 
The  Tagalog  Provinces 

Batangas.  —  The  province  of 
Batangas  is  mainly  highland 
and  mountains.  In  the  center 
of  Batangas  is  Lake  Taal.1  From 
an  island  in  the  lake  rises  Taal 
Volcano.  There  are  hot  lakes 

1  See  picture  on  page  6. 


52 


PHILIPPINE   GEOGRAPHY   PKIMER 


of  different  colors  in  the  crater. 
Many  times  in  the  past  the  vol- 
cano has  thrown  out  lava  and 
destroyed  people  and  towns. 


The  crater  of  Taal  volcano 

Batangas  once  produced  much 
coffee  and  many  fine  horses. 
The  rust1  destroyed  the  coffee 
trees,  and  the  surra  killed  many 
horses.  The  government  is  now 
planting  new  coffee  trees,  and  is 
bringing  fine  horses  to  the  Phil- 
ippines. Rice,  sugar,  and  corn 
are  the  chief  products  of  Batan- 
gas. Many  fruits  are  grown, 
and  some  hemp  is  raised. 

There  are  several  large  and 
well-built  towns  in  Batangas. 
Among  them  are  Liipa,  Batangas, 
Baan,  and  Taal.  Batangas  is 
the  capital.  The  people  of  Ba- 
tangas province  are  Tagalogs. 

Tayabas  is  the  longest  prov- 
ince of  Luzon.  It  is  very  moun- 
tainous. There  are  fine  woods 
in  the  forests.  The  chief  pro- 
ducts are  rice,  sugar,  copra,  and 
tobacco.  The  oil  of  the  lumban 
seed  is  used  for  lamps  and  in 
paint.  The  people  of  Tayabas 
build  many  boats.  Can  you  tell 

1 A  disease  of  the  coffee  tree. 


why  ?  Sinamay  and  pina  cloth 
are  woven  there. 

Lucena  is  the  capital  of  the 
province.  Lucbdn  and  Tayabas 
are  important  towns.  The  people 
are  nearly  all  Tagalogs.  On  the 
east  coast  there  are  some  Bicols, 
and  in  the  mountains  a  few 
Negritos. 

Polillo  Island  belongs  to  Ta- 
yabas. Fine  coal  is  found  there. 
Marinduque  also  belongs  to 
Tayabas.  It  is  a  mountainous 
island,  thickly  inhabited  by 
Tagalogs.  Boac  is  the  chief 
town.  Rice,  sugar,  coconuts, 
and  abaca  are  the  chief  pro- 
ducts. 


Copyright,  19i>0>,  by  C.  W.  Hodgson. 
A  road  near  Lucena 

Helps.  —  Describe  the  surface  of  Ba- 
tangas. What  famous  lake  and  volcano 
are  in  Batangas  ?  What  were  formerly 
the  two  great  products  of  Batangas? 
Why  did  they  fail  ?  What  is  the  gov- 
ernment doing  about  it  ?  What  are 
now  the  chief  products  ?  Name  four 
large  towns.  What  is  the  capital? 
To  what  tribe  do  the  people  belong  ? 


THE   PHILIPPINE   ISLANDS 


53 


Describe  the  surface  of  Tayabas. 
What  are  the  products  ?  What  town 
is  the  capital  ?  Name  other  impor- 
tant towns.  Who  are  the  people? 
Name  two  islands  that  belong  to  Taya- 
bas.  What  mineral  is  found  on  Po- 
lillo?  What  is  the  chief  town  of 
Marinduque  ?  What  are  the  products 
of  Marinduque  ?  To  what  tribe  do 
the  Marinduque  people  belong  ? 

The  Bicol  Provinces 

TJie  Bicol  Peninsula  has  many 
mountains,  rivers,  and  waterfalls. 
The  inhabitants  are  mainly  Bi- 
cols.  Negritos  live  in  the  moun- 
tains. The  rich  and  fertile 
valley  of  the  Bicol,  the  largest 
river,  is  the  rice  field  of  southern 
Luzon. 

May  on  Volcano,  in  Albay 
province,  is  the  highest  moun- 
tain and  the  most  active  volcano 
in  Luzon  (2412  meters  -  7916 
feet).  In  the  nineteenth  cen- 
tury it  was  in  violent  eruption 
twenty-five  times,  destroying 


most  beautiful  mountains  in  the 
world. 

The  three  Bicol  provinces  are 
the  richest  hemp-growing  region 


An  old  church  at  Daraya,  destroyed  by  May6n 

whole  villages  and  killing  many 
people.      May  on  is  one   of   the 


Mayon 

in  the  Philippines.  Good  roads 
have  been  built,  on  which  to 
carry  the  hemp  to  the  seaports. 

In  Albay  and  Sorsogon  there 
are  forests  of  fine  wood,  and  boat 
building  is  an  important  indus- 
try. Besides  hemp  and  timber, 
other  products  of  the  Bicol  prov- 
inces are  copra,  alcohol,  sugar, 
and  ilang-ilang,  a  flower  from 
which  perfume  is  made.  On  the 
island  of  Batdn  coal  is  mined. 

Nueva  Cdceres,  the  capital  of 
Ambos  Camarines,  is  the  most 
important  Bicol  town.  Albay  is 
the  capital  of  Albay  province ; 
and  Sorsoyon  is  the  capital  of 
Sorsogon  province.  Leyazpi  is 
the  chief  hemp  port.  At  Pa- 
racale  gold  is  found.  Daet  and 
San  Jose  are  important  seaports. 

Helps.  —  Where  is  the  Bicol  penin- 
sula? Describe  its  surface.  Who 
are  its  inhabitants?  Name  its  three 
provinces.  What  is  the  chief  river  ? 


54 


PHILIPPINE  GEOGRAPHY   PRIMER 


What  is  produced  in  the  valley  of  this 
river  ?  What  famous  volcano  is  in 
Albay  ?  Tell  what  you  know  about  it. 
What  is  the  chief  product  of  the 
Bicol  peninsula?  Name  other  pro- 
ducts. What  is  the  chief  city  of  Am- 
bos  Camarines?  The  chief  port  of 
Albay?  Name  other  important  towns. 
On  what  island  is  coal  mined?  Name 
the  capital  of  each  of  the  three  prov- 
inces. 

Spell.  —  Camarines,  peninsula, 
ilang-ilang,  Sorsogon,  Mayon. 

Masbate   and  Mindoro 

Masbate  is  now  a  part  of  the 
province  of  Sorsogon.  Burias 
and  Ticao  islands  also  belong  to 
Sorsogon.  The  people  of  these 
islands  are  mainly  Visayans. 
Among  them  are  a  few  Bicols 
and  Tagalogs. 

Masbate  produces  timber, 
sugar,  coconuts,  and  hemp. 
There  are  some  gold  mines  on 
Masbate  which  are  worked  by 
machinery.  In  Burias  the  chief 
industry  is  weaving  sacks  and 
mats  from  buri  leaves. 

Mindoro.  —  The  coast  of  Min- 
doro is  regular,  low,  and  sandy. 
The  interior  is  mountainous  and 
covered  with  thick  forests. 
Along  the  coast  there  are  a  few 
towns  peopled  by  Visayans  and 
Tagalogs,  and  in  the  mountains 
little  villages  of  Mangyans,  a  sav- 
age tribe  much  like  the  Negritos. 
But  the  greater  part  of  Mindoro 


is  uninhabited.     Its  rich  soil  and 
valuable  timber  are  unused. 


Mangyans 

The  principal  business  of  the 
people  of  the  coast  towns  is  trade 
in  forest  products.  They  export 
bejuco,  nipa,  sago,  timber,  and 
a  few  cattle.  They  also  raise 
sugar,  rice,  hemp,  and  tobacco. 

Calapdn  is  the  capital  and  prin- 
cipal town.  Mt.  Halcon  is  the 
second  highest  mountain  in  the 
Philippines.  The  small  islands 
that  make  the  Lubang  group  be- 
long to  the  province  of  Mindoro. 

Helps.  —  Name  three  islands  that 
belong  to  Sorsogon.  Who  are  the 
people  of  these  islands  ?  Name  the 
largest  islands.  What  are  four  pro- 
ducts of  Masbate?  What  metal  is 
mined  in  Masbate  ?  What  is  the  chief 
industry  of  Burias  ? 

Describe  the  coast  of  Mindoro.  De- 
scribe its  surface.  Who  are  the  in- 
habitants ?  What  are  the  products  ? 
The  chief  towns  ?  What  is  the  high- 
est mountain  ?  What  group  of  small 
islands  is  north  of  Mindoro  ? 

Spell.  —  Burias,  Ticao,  Mindoro, 
Halcon,  Mangy  an,  bejuco. 


THE  PHILIPPINE   ISLANDS 


Review  Questions  on  the  Luz6n  Group. 

—  Describe  the  surface  of  Luzon. 
What  part  of  all  the  Filipinos  live  on 
Luzon  ?  Name  the  part  of  Luzon 
that  produces  the  most  tobacco. 
Sugar.  Hemp.  Name  two  islands 
of  the  Luzon  group  on  which  coal  is 
found.  Name  three  provinces  in 
which  maguey  is  grown.  Name  two 
provinces  that  grow  indigo.  Which 
province  raises  the  most  cotton  ? 


Loading  hemp 

In  what  part  of  Luzon  do  the  Igo- 
rots  live  ?  The  Negritos  ?  Through 
which  provinces  of  Luzon  do  railroads 
run  ?  What  is  the  largest  town  next 
to  Manila?  What  town  is  the  sum- 
mer capital  of  the  Philippines  ?  What 
is  the  largest  river  of  Luzon?  The 
highest  mountain  ?  The  largest  plain  ? 
The  highest  plateau  ?  The  largest  lake  ? 

Why  has  Manila  become  a  great 
city  ?  Name  the  provinces  of  the 
Cagayan  valley.  Give  the  capital  of 
each.  How  many  provinces  in  Luzon  ? 
Name  the  provinces  of  the  Ilocos  coast. 
Give  the  capital  of  each.  Name  the 
lake  provinces.  Give  the  capital  of 
each.  Name  the  provinces  of  the  cen- 
tral plain.  Give  the  capital  of  each. 
Name  the  Bicol  provinces.  Give  the 
capital  of  each.  What  other  provinces 
are  there  ?  Name  the  capital  of  each. 

Name  a  naval  station  of  the  United 


States  in  Luzon.  What  province  is 
noted  in  history?  What  town  was 
the  home  of  Salcedo  ?  Who  settled 
in  Manila  in  1571  ?  When  was  Ma- 
nila captured  by  the  Americans  ? 

2.  The  Visayan  Group 

The  Visayan  islands  lie  be- 
tween Luzon  and  Mindoro  on  the 
north,  and  Mindanao  on  the  south. 
Samar  ^  Leyte,  Panay,  Negros, 
Cebu,  and  Bohol  are  the  largest 
islands.  There  are  more  than 
2,600,000  of  the  Visayan  people, 
and  nearly  all  of  them  live  on 
the  islands  of  this  group. 

Samar  and  Leyte 

Samar  is  the  largest  of  the  Visa- 
yan islands,  and  the  third  in  size 
of  all  the  islands  of  the  Philip- 
pines. Yet  some  of  the  smaller 
Visayan  islands  have  more  people 
than  Samar.  One  reason  for  this 


Copyright,  1906,  by  C.  W.  Hodgson. 
San  Juanico  Straits  between  Samar  and  Leyte 

is  that  there  are  no  wide  plains 
and  valleys  in  Samar,  and  the 
high  hills,  the  rivers,  and  the 
thick  forests  make  traveling  diffi- 
cult. Therefore,  there  are  no 
large  towns  away  from  the  coast. 


PHILIPPINE   GEOGRAPHY  PBIMER 


S^mar  produces  hemp  of  the 
first  class,  sugar-cane,  and  rice. 
Copra  and  coconut  oil  are  ex- 
ported from  the  east  and  south 
coasts. 

Caibalogan,  the  capital,  has  a 
large  trade  with  Manila  in  hemp 
and  copra.  Calbayog  is  the 
largest  town.  Homonlion  Island 
was  the  first  island  of  the  Philip- 
pines on  which  the  Spaniards 
landed. 

Leyte.  -  -  Leyte  has  a  larger 
population  than  Samar.  Its 
mountains  are  higher,  but  its 
plains  are  broader.  Hemp  grow- 
ing is  the  leading  industry.  Rice, 
sugar-cane,  cacao,  and  corn  are 
raised.  Rope  is  manufactured, 


Making  rope  of  abaca  fiber 

and  much  coconut  oil  is  ex- 
ported. Wax  and  honey  are 
found  in  the  forests.  What  in- 
sects make  wax  and  honey? 
Sponges,  shells,  and  pearls  are 
gathered  from  the  sea. 

Tadoban,   the   capital,    is   an 


important  port  at  which  many 
boats  are  built.  Three  important 
hemp  shipping  ports  are  Baybayy 
Ormoc,  and  Maasin. 

The  little  island  of  Limasaua 
is  south  of  Leyte.  Here,  in 
1521,  Magellan  took  possession 
of  the  Philippines  in  the  name 
of  the  king  of  Spain. 

Helps.  —  Between  what  large  islands 
does  the  Visayan  group  lie  ?  Name  the 
larger  islands  of  this  group.  Who  are 
the  inhabitants  ?  How  does  Samar 
compare  in  size  with  other  islands  of 
the  Philippines  ?  Why  has  Samar  so 
few  people  ?  What  are  its  chief  pro- 
ducts ?  What  is  the  capital  ?  The 
largest  town  ?  Why  is  Homonhon 
famous  in  Philippine  history  ? 

Describe  the  surface  of  Leyte. 
Name  the  agricultural  products.  Name 
two  products  from  the  forests.  Name 
three  from  the  sea.  What  is  the  capi- 
tal ?  The  largest  town  ?  Name  three 
important  hemp  ports.  WThat  did 
Magellan  do  at  Limasaua  ? 

Spell.  —  Catbaldgan,  Tacloban, 
Leyte,  possession. 

Cebu  and  Bohol 

Cebu.  —  This  island  is  a  long 
mountain  range  with  steep  slopes 
running  down  to  the  sea.  The 
coastal  plains  are  narrow.  The 
western  mountain  slope  is  cov- 
ered with  forests.  Coconut 
palms  grow  in  the  lowlands. 
There  is  not  enough  rain  in 
Cebu  for  very  good  farming. 
Fruit  growing  is  an  important 
industry,  because  fruit  trees  do 


'{r-'/'-lA-OU**  "N 

Mambajao^      -%]  MT.L,,:'.  .,eui<it  Pt. 

—&3&§&:.  => 

Talifafa^Ki-'ufllfe^:   ^^ZX^xCiMT^^Sg 


UU.  POATES  ENGR"~iCO.,  N.Y. 


Copyright,  1906,  by  Caspar  W.  Hodgson 


58 


PHILIPPINE   GEOGRAPHY  PRIMER 


not  need  much  rain.  Some  rice 
is  raised,  but  more  is  imported 
from  other  islands.  Corn,  hemp, 
sugar-cane,  and  cotton  are  the 
chief  agricultural  products. 

The  chief  manufactured  pro- 
ducts are  salt,  alcohol,  pottery, 
and  cloth  made  from  hemp,  silk, 
pina,  and  cotton.  Cebu  has  valu- 
able fisheries,  and  sponges  and 
shells  are  collected  from  the  sea. 
In  its  mountains  coal  and  gold 
have  been  found. 

The  province  of  Cebu  has  a 
population  of  650,000,  the  largest 
of  all  the  provinces  of  the  Philip- 
pines. The  island  of  Cebu  is  the 
third  island  of  the  Philippines  in 
population. 


Many  foreign  merchants  have 
fine  business  houses  in  Cebu. 
Carcar,  Argao,  and  Dumanjug 
are  other  important  towns. 


Loading  copra  at  Cebu 

The  city  of  Cebu,  which  is  the 
capital  of  the  province,  is  the 
second  city  of  the  Philippines 
in  foreign  commerce.  Boats 
from  many  smaller  ports  bring 
cargoes  to  Cebu,  and  Cebu  sends 
out  ships  laden  with  hemp,  copra, 
and  sugar  to  Manila,  America, 
England,  China,  and  Japan. 


Fort  San  Pedro,  Cebu 

Cebu  was  the  first  city  in  the 
Philippines  settled  by  the  Span- 
iards. Legazpi  came  here  in 
1565.  In  1521  Magellan  was 
killed  in  Mact&n,  an  island  near 
Cebu. 

Bohol  has  many  mountains 
and  is  nearly  round  in  shape.  Its 
rivers  are  small,  and  its  coast  is 
sandy.  The  soil  of  Bohol  is  not 
so  fertile  as  the  soil  of  the  other 
large  Visayan  islands.  Rice,  corn, 
tobacco,  and  cacao  are  raised. 

Bohol  is  thickly  inhabited  and 
its  people  are  hard  workers. 
They  cultivate  the  soil,  weave 
cloth  of  cotton,  silk,  and  hemp, 
make  mats,  fish,  and  gather  shells 
and  pearls.  They  sell  their 
products  to  the  people  of  the 
other  islands. 

The  exports  of  Bohol  are 
copra,  wax,  seashells,  pearls,  and 
tortoise  shells.  Tagbilaran,  the 
capital,  and  Loon,  Tubiyon,  and 
Calape  are  large  towns. 


THE   PHILIPPINE   ISLANDS 


59 


Helps.  —  Describe  the  shape  and 
surface  of  Cebii.  Why  is  fruit  grow- 
ing an  important  industry?  Name 
four  agricultural  products.  The  chief 
manufactured  products.  Four  kinds 
of  cloth  woven.  Two  mountain  pro- 
ducts. What  is  the  population  of  Cebii  ? 
How  many  islands  have  more  people 
than  Cebii?  Which  islands  are  they  ? 
Tell  about  the  commerce  of  the  city  of 
Cebii.  Why  is  Cebii  famous  in  his- 
tory ?  What  happened  at  Mactan  in 
1521  ?  When  did  Legazpi  reach 
Cebu? 

Tell  about  the  surface,  shape,  rivers, 
and  coast  of  Bohol.  Tell  about  its 
soil.  Its  agricultural  products.  Its 
manufactures.  Its  people.  Its  ex- 
ports. Its  chief  towns. 

Spell.  —  Legazpi,  settled,  Magellan, 
Mactan,  Tagbilaran. 

Negros  and  Panay 

Negros  is  the  fourth  island  of 
the  Philippines  in  size.  A  lofty 
mountain  range  divides  the  island 
into  two  provinces.  What  are 
they  called  ?  In  the  northern 
part  of  Negros  is  the  volcano 
Canldon,  the  highest  mountain 
in  the  Visayas  (2496  meters  = 
8192  feet).  ^Do  you  know  the 
story  of  "  Harisaboqued "  and 
Canlaon  ? 

Oriental  Negros  has  few  rivers 
and  harbors.  Dumaguete,  the 
capital,  is  a  great  hemp  port. 
Bais  is  an  important  sugar  town. 
Corn,  cacao,  and  some  tree  cotton 
are  raised.  Rope,  bayones,  jusi, 
and  sinamay  cloth  are  made. 


The  thickly  populated  island  of 
Siguijor  belongs  to  Oriental 
Negros.  Hemp  is  its  chief 
product. 


Weaving 

Occidental  Negros  is  the  larger 
and  richer  of  the  two  provinces. 
It  has  a  wide  coastal  plain,  but 
few  harbors.  The  soil  is  vol- 
canic and  rich.  Bacolod,  the 
capital,  is  a  prosperous  town. 
Silay  is  the  most  important  port. 

In  the  northeast  part  of  the 
province  much  tobacco  is  raised. 
Occidental  Negros  raises  more 
sugar  than  any  other  province. 
One  reason  for  the  great  produc- 
tion of  sugar  is  because  many  of 
the  planters  use  steam  sugar  mills. 
These  do  the  work  better  and 
faster  than  the  old  carabao  mills. 
In  some  parts  of  Negros  the  rivers 
furnish  power  to  turn  the  mills. 

Panay  is  a  little  smaller  than 
either  Samar  or  Negros,  but  has 
more  people  than  both  of  these 
islands  together.  Nearly  a  mil- 
lion people  live  in  Panay.  Lofty 


60 


PHILIPPINE   GEOGRAPHY   PKIMEB, 


mountain  ranges  divided  it  into 
three  provinces.     Name  them. 

The  products  of  Panay  are  like 
those  of  Negros.  Sugar,  rice, 
alcohol,  copra,  corn,  and  cacao 
are  raised,  as  well  as  tobacco, 
pepper,  pineapples,  and  dye  wood. 
An  important  industry  of  Panay 
is  weaving  sinamay,  jusi,  pina, 
and  cotton  cloth. 


Loading  sugar  at  Iloilo 

Iloilo  is  the  second  city  in  size 
in  the  Philippines.  It  has  a  very 
large  commerce.  The  products 
of  Panay  and  of  the  rich  plain  of 
Occidental  Negros  are  brought 
here  by  small  vessels.  From 
Iloilo  they  are  sent  to  Manila  and 
to  China,  Japan,  England,  and 
other  parts  of  the  world.  Iloilo 
has  fine  wharves  and  a  good 
harbor.  Sugar  is  the  chief  export. 
Janiuay  and  Cdbatuan  are  im- 
portant towns  in  Iloilo  province. 

In  Capiz  province  there  are 
wide,  low  plains  near  the  coast. 


The  chief  products  are  sugar  and 
alcohol.  Sacks,  hats,  and  bas- 
kets are  made.  Capiz  is  the 
capital  and  chief  town. 

Antique  is  separated  from  Iloilo 
and  Capiz  provinces  by  a  high 
mountain  range.  The  coastal 
plain  is  very  narrow.  In  the 
narrow  valleys  rice  and  other 
agricultural  products  are  raised. 
Alcohol  and  cloth  are  important 
products.  San  Jose,  the  capital, 
is  a  beautiful  town  overlooking 
the  sea.  Sibalom,  Pandan,  and 
Calivo  are  large  towns. 

Helps.  —What  island  of  the  Philip- 
pines is  fourth  in  size  ?  Tell  what 
you  know  about  Canlaon.  Describe 
the  surface  of  Negros.  Name  two 
products,  two  towns,  and  three  manu- 
factures of  Oriental  Negros.  What 
island  belongs  to  this  province  ? 
What  is  the  chief  product  of  Siquijor  ? 
What  is  the  chief  product  of.  Occi- 
dental Negros  ?  Why  is  so  much 
sugar  raised  in  this  province  ?  Name 
two  important  towns. 

What  is  the  population  of  Panay  ? 
Describe  the  surface  of  Panay.  What 
are  the  agricultural  products  ?  Name 
two  industries.  Why  is  Iloilo  an 
important  city  ?  What  does  it  export  ? 
What  other  important  towns  are  in 
Iloilo  province? 

Describe  the  surface  of  Capiz  prov- 
ince. What  are  the  chief  products  ? 
What  is  the  capital  ?  Describe  the 
surface  of  Antique  province.  What 
are  the  products  ?  Name  the  capital. 
Large  towns. 

Spell.  —  Canlaon,  Harisaboqued, 
Siquijor,  Bacolod. 


THE   PHILIPPINE   ISLANDS 


61 


Romblon  and  Palawan  Provinces. 

The  province  of  Romblon  in- 
cludes the  islands  of  Romblon, 
Tobias,  Sibuyan,  and  some  other 
small  islands.  The  central  is- 
land, Romblon,  is  small,  but  has 
a  large  population.  The  harbor 
is  one  of  the  best  in  the  Philip- 
pines. Cattle,  copra,  coconut  oil, 
mats,  and  marble,1  are  exported. 
The  people  are  Visayans. 

Tablas  and  Sibuyan  are  poor- 
er islands  than  Romblon.  Here 
the  people  live  mainly  by  fishing. 

Palawan  is  the  main  island  of 
the  group  that  forms  the  province 
Palawan.  A  mountain  range 
runs  through  its  center.  Some 
peaks  are  more  than  two  thou- 
sand meters  high.  The  Tag- 
bamias  and  Bataks,  wild  people, 
live  in  the  mountain  forests. 
They  carry  on  a  trade  in  wax 
and  other  forest  products  with  the 
Visayans  of  the  coast.  Moros 
live  in  the  southern  part  of  the 
island.  The  population  of  Pala- 
wan is  about  ten  thousand. 

There  are  some  plants  and  an- 
imals in  Palawan  province  that 
are  not  found  in  other  parts  of 
the  Philippines.  One  is  a  long- 
nosed  animal  that  eats  ants. 
Another  is  the  pelandoc,  or  little 
mouse  deer,  of  the  island  of 
Baldbac.  This  deer  is  less  than  a 

1  Marble  is  a  fine  kind  of  building  stone. 


foot  high.  The  Malay  or  sun  bear 
is  found  on  the  island  of  Palawan. 

Puerto 
Princesa, 
on  a  fine 
harbor,  is 
the  capi- 
tal. Here 

the     gov-  Malay  bear 

eminent 

has  a  great  farm  where  prisoners 
are  sent  from  other  islands  to  culti- 
vate the  land.  Gum,  wax,  rattan, 
and  timber  are  the  chief  exports. 

The  Cuyos  islands  belong  to 
the  province  of  Palawan.  Cuyo 
has  a  large  population.  Turtle 
fishing  is  an  industry  there.  The 
Calamianes  islands  and  many 
other  small  islands  also  belong 
to  Palawan  province.  On  the 
island  of  Culion  the  government 
has  built  a  town  for  the  lepers  of 
the  Philippines. 

Helps.  —  Name  the  more  important 
islands  belonging  to  Kombl<5n  prov- 
ince. What  is  said  about  the  harbor 
of  Komblon  ?  About  the  products  ? 
The  people  ?  What  is  said  of  two 
other  islands  of  this  group? 

Describe 
the  sur- 
face of 
Pa  law  a  n. 
Who  are 
the  people? 
What  is  the 
population? 
What  wild 
Mouse  deer  animals  are 


62 


PHILIPPINE   GEOGRAPHY  PKIMEE 


found  in  this  province  ?  What  city  is 
the  capital  ?  What  colony  is  at  the 
capital  ?  What  are  the  exports  ? 
What  other  islands  belong  to  Palawan 
province?  What  is  said  of  Cuyo? 
What  colony  is  on  Culidn  ? 

Spell.  —  Marble,  Sibuyan,  Tagbanua, 
Balabac,  Calamianes,  Cuyos,  Culidn. 

3.  The   Mindanao  Group 

Mindanao  is  about  the  size  of 
Luzon.  Its  coast  is  irregular. 
There  are  six  large  bays,  but  few 
good  harbors.  The  mountains  are 
near  the  sea  and  surround  the 
island  like  a  wall,  except  where 
a  few  large  valleys  open  on  the 
coast.  Mt.  Apo  (3143  meters  = 
10,312  feet)  is  the  highest  moun- 
tain in  the  Philippines. 

Mindanao  is  formed  by  three 
large  peninsulas  :  Surigao,  Cota- 
bato,  and  Zamboanga.  A  great 
mountain  range  runs  through 
each  peninsula. 


The  valley  of  the  Agusan  river 

There  are  two  large  river 
systems,  each  of  which  drains  a 
rich  valley.  The  Agusan  river 
is  bordered  with  thick  forests. 


Near  its  mouth,  groves  of  coco- 
nut palms  and  great  fields  of 
hemp  grow  along  its  banks. 
Only  a  few  thousand  people  live 
in  the  valley  of  the  Agusan. 
The  inhabitants  of  the  large 
towns  are  Yisayans.  Hemp  and 
rice  are  the  chief  products. 

The  largest  river  of  Mindanao 
is  the  Mindanao,  or  Rio  Grande 
de  Mindanao.  It  is  483  kilo- 
meters from  the  source  of  this 
river  to  its  mouth. 

In  the  great  valley  of  the  Minda- 
nao there  are  only  four  large  towns. 
Abaca,  copra,  gutta-percha,  and 
forest  products  are  the  exports. 
The  industries  are  few,  and  many 
thousands  of  hectares  of  land  re- 
main un- 
plan  ted. 
Igno- 
rance, 
war,  and 
slavery 
have 
caused 
this  rich 
country  to 
remain  a 
wilder- 
ness. 

There  are  several  large  lakes 
in  Mindanao.  Many  Moros  live 
around  Lake  Lanao.  Spices  grow 
in  the  same  region.  West  of  the 
Lanao  region  lies  the  Zamboanga 
peninsula.  The  only  large  town 


Moro  boat  on  Lake  Lanao 


THE  PHILIPPINE   ISLANDS 


63 


A  view  at  Zamboanga 


Copyright,  1904,  by  D.  Encinas. 


there  is  Zamboanga.  It  is  the  chief 
port  of  Mindanao  for  the  export 
of  hemp,  copra,  and  gutta-percha. 
The  people  of  this  peninsula  are 
Visayans,  Moros,  and  Subanos. 
The  Subanos  are  a  peaceable, 
wild  tribe.  They  are  timid  and 
poor,  because  for  centuries  the 
Moros  made  slaves  of  them. 

There  are  many  other  tribes 
like  the  Subanos  living  in  differ- 
ent parts  of  Mindanao.  High 
mountain  ranges,  dense  forests, 
and  many  rivers,  make  travel  so 
difficult  that  these  wild  tribes  do 
not  know  each  other,  and  they 
do  not  know  the  civilized  people 
who  live  in  the  towns.  For  these 
reasons  they  remain  ignorant  and 
savage. 

Mindanao  has  more  unused 
rich  soil  than  any  other  of  the 
islands  of  the  Philippines.  This 
great  island  has  only  five  hundred 
thousand  people,  and  half  of 
these  are  wild. 

Surigao  and  Misamis  prov- 
inces in  the  north  are  inhabited 
chiefly  by  Visayans.  Hemp  and 


copra  are  the  main  exports. 
Surigao  and  Cagaydn  are  the 
principal  towns. 

The  Moro  Province.  —  All  of 
southern  and  western  Mindanao 
belongs  to  the  Moro  province. 
The  Sulu  Archipelago  is  also  a 
part  of  the  Moro  province.  The 
people  of  this  province  are  nearly 
all  Moros. 


Moros.    In  the  first  row  are  a  sultan  and  three 
dattos 

The  government  of  the  Moro 
province  is  different  from  that  of 
any  other  province.  It  is  partly 
military.  The  governor  of  the 
Moro  province  has  great  power. 
This  is  given  him  because  the 
people  of  this  part  of  the  Philip- 
pine Islands  are  so  often  at  war 


64 


PHILIPPINE   GEOGRAPHY  PRIMER 


with  each  other.  The  governor 
general  of  the  Philippines  ap- 
points the  governor  of  the  Moro 
province.  The  Moro  province  is 
divided  into  five  districts,  each  of 
which  has  its  own  governor. 

Mindanao  is  the  richest  in  soil 
and  forests  of  all  the  islands  of 
the  Philippines.  The  peo2ile  are 
few.  Many  of  them  are  wild; 
many  are  Moros. 

Helps.  —  How  large  is  Mindanao? 
Describe  the  coast  of  Mindanao. 
Where  are  the  mountains  ?  What  is 
the  highest  mountain  ?  What  are  the 
two  great  rivers  ?  Describe  the  Agii- 
san  valley.  How  many  inhabitants 
has  this  valley  ?  Who  are  they  ?  How 
many  large  towns  are  in  the  Mindanao 
valley?  What  are  the  products  of 
this  valley  ?  Why  is  so  much  fertile 
land  in  Mindanao  unused  ?  What  is 
the  most  important  lake  of  Mindanao? 
What  people  live  near  this  lake  ? 
What  are  the  products  ?  What  people 
inhabit  Zamboanga  peninsula  ?  Name 
the  exports  of  Zamboanga.  Why  are 
there  many  tribes  in  Mindanao  ?  How 
many  inhabitants  has  Mindanao  ? 

Name  the  two  Christian  provinces. 
Who  are  the  inhabitants  ?  Name  the 
products.  Towns.  Where  is  the 
Moro  province  ?  Who  inhabit  this 
province  ?  Tell  about  the  government 
of  the  Moro  province. 

Spell. — Mindanao,  Surigao,  igno- 
rance, slavery,  wilderness. 

The  Sulu  Archipelago 

The  Sulu  Islands  are  the  tops 
of  a  mountain  range,  most  of 


which  is  beneath  the  sea.  Nearly 
all  the  islands  are  too  small  to 
be  of  great  value  for  farming. 
The  people  live  by  fishing  and 
trading.  They  are  Moros. 

In  former  days  the  people  of 
these  islands  were  pirates.  They 
were  ruled  by  a  sultan  and  dattos. 
The  Spaniards  never  fully  con- 
quered the  Moros.  For  hundreds 
of  years  the  Moros  were  the 
enemies  of  the  Christian  Filipi- 
nos. Whenever  they  could,  they 
burned  the  towns  along  the 
coasts  of  the  Visayan  islands, 
and  carried  away  the  people  as 
slaves. 

Jolo  is  the  principal  island  of 
the  Sulu  group.  It  is  small,  but 
fertile  and  thickly  populated. 
Rice,  coffee,  tobacco,  and  hemp 
are  raised.  In  the  forests  are 
valuable  building  woods.  Pearl 
fishing  is  a  great  industry. 

The  Moros  dress  in  bright  colors. 
The  men  wear  a  short  sword,  or 
kris.  They  are  skillful  workers 
in  steel  and  brass,  and  build  fine 
boats. 

The  Sulu  archipelago  is  in- 
habited by  Moros.  Pearl  fishing 
is  the  leading  industry. 

Helps.  —  How  were  the  Sulu  islands 
formed?  How  do  the  people  live? 
What  did  they  do  formerly?  How 
were  they  ruled?  What  is  the  chief 
island  ?  What  are  its  products  ?  What 


THE  PHILIPPINE  ISLANDS 


65 


Copyright,  1104,  by  D.  Enemas. 


Jolo,  looking  south  from  the  lighthouse 


is  taken  from  the  sea  ?  How  do  the 
Moros  dress  ?  What  do  they  manu- 
facture ? 

Spell.  —  Archipelago,  pearl,  sultan, 
Christian,  Mahometan,  kris. 


Review  Questions  on  the  Visayan 
and  Mindanao  Groups. — Name  the  six 
great  Visayan  islands  from  east  to 
west.  Which  is  the  largest  ?  Which 
has  the  most  people  ?  In  which  is  the 
highest  mountain  ?  In  which  is  the 
most  weaving  done  ?  In  which  of  these 
islands  do  Negritos  live  ?  Name  the 
two  largest  cities.  Which  has  the 


most  foreign  commerce  ?  Which  island 
produces  the  most  sugar  ?  Which  is 
famous  in  history  ?  Which  of  the 
Visayan  provinces  has  the  most  people? 
In  what  Visayan  island  is  marble 
found  ? 

Name  the  three  great  peninsulas  of 
Mindanao.  What  provinces  are  in 
Mindanao  ?  Name  the  capital  of  each. 
What  great  lake  is  in  Mindanao? 
Which  is  the  greatest  river?  The 
highest  mountain  ?  What  are  the 
chief  products  of  Mindanao  ?  The 
chief  port  ?  What  people  live  in  Min- 
danao and  the  Sulu  archipelago? 


PART  IV 


THE   CONTINENTS   AND   COUNTRIES   OF  THE  WORLD 


I.     ASIA 


1.   Asia   as   a   Whole 


Surface.  —  Asia  is  the  largest 
of  the  continents.  Nearly  one 
third  of  all  the  land,  and  more 
than  one  half  of  all  the  people 
in  the  world,  are  in  Asia.  The 
Philippine  Islands  are  Asiatic 
islands.  Most  of  the  plants, 
wild  animals,  and  peoples  of  the 
Philippines,  came  from  Asia. 

In  Asia  are  the  highest  moun- 
tains of  the  world,  the  Himalayas, 
Find  them  on  the  map.  North 
of  these  mountains  is  the  great, 
high  plateau  of  Tibet.  North  of 
Tibet  lie  great  deserts,1  and  be- 
tween the  deserts  and  the  Arctic 
ocean  is  the  great  Siberian  plain. 
West  of  Tibet  are  several  lower 
plateaus,  some  of  them  fertile, 
and  some  desert.  East  of  Tibet 
lie  the  great  plains  of  China  and 
Indo-China.  In  southern  Asia 
there  are  three  great  peninsulas. 
Name  them. 

Climate.  —  The  great  continent 
of  Asia  extends  from  near  the 

1A  desert  is  a  country  where  there  is 
little  or  no  rain,  and  therefore,  no  plants 
or  animals. 


equator  to  the  Arctic  ocean,  and 
has  every  kind  of  climate.  The 
southeastern  part  has  much  rain 
because  of  the  warm  ocean  winds. 
Central  Asia  is  dry  and  barren 
because  it  is  far  from  the  sea. 
Southwestern  Asia  is  very  hot, 
and  northwestern  Asia  is  the  cold- 
est inhabited  region  in  the  world. 

Plants.  —  Much  grain  is  raised 
in  northern  Asia.  China  and 
Japan  produce  a  great  part  of 
the  world's  tea.  In  southern 
Asia  cotton,  sugar-cane,  rice,  and 
coconuts  grow.  In  the  large 
islands  south  of  Asia  are  found 
tea,  coffee,  tobacco,  cinnamon, 
pepper,  cloves, nutmegs,  and  many 
other  useful  plant  products.  In 
southern  and  in  northern  Asia 
are  vast  forests. 

Animals.  —  There  are  many 
wild  animals  in  Asia.  The  ele- 
ph  an  t , 
camel, 
rhinoce- 
ros, lion, 
tiger, 
wolf, 
reindeer,  Elepllant 


67 


10  20"       30       4IP      ;">0       Gl 


6<\J        Longitude   E  70*  Ea«t  F        .1 


70 


PHILIPPINE   GEOGRAPHY   PRIMER 


Reindeer 


and  bear  are  found  there.  Horses, 
cattle,  sheep,  and  goats  are  numer- 
ous in  cen- 
tral Asia. 
In  south- 
ern Asia 
are  many 
strange 
reptiles 
and  birds. 
People.  —  Eastern  Asia  is  in- 
habited by  the  yellow  race.  In 
the  southeastern  part  most  of  the 
people  are  brown.  In  India  and 
in  western  Asia  most  of  the  peo- 
ple belong  to  the  white  race. 
The  natives  of  northern  Asia  are 
Mongolians,  but  many  Russians 
now  live  there. 

Helps.  —  Which,  continent  is  the 
largest  ?  How  much  of  the  land  of 
the  world  is  in  Asia  ?  What  part 
of  the  people  of  the  world  are  in 
Asia  ?  From  what  continents  did 
most  of  the  plants,  animals,  and  people 
of  the  Philippines  come  ?  What  are 
the  highest  mountains  of  the  world  ? 
Where  are  they  ? 

Describe  the  northern  part  of 
Asia.  The  eastern  part.  The  west- 
ern part.  Which  part  of  Asia  is 
coldest  ?  Which  part  is  hottest  ? 

Which 
part  has 
the  least 
rain?  The 
most  rain  ? 
Name  the 
chief  pro- 
ducts  of 
northe  rn 
Brown  bear  Asia.  Of 


eastern  Asia.  Of  southern  Asia.  Of 
the  islands  south  of  Asia.  What 
race  lives  in  eastern  Asia?  In  south- 
eastern Asia  ?  In  India  and  western 
Asia  ?  In  northern  Asia  ? 

Spell.  —  Tibet,  Siberian,  Himalayas, 
reptiles,  elephant. 

Asia 

(See  the  map  on  pages  68  and  69.) 
Map  Questions.  — What  ocean  is  north 
of  Asia?  East?  South?  What  con- 
tinent is  west  ?  Southwest  ?  Name  a 
sea  south  of  Asia.  A  large  gulf. 
What  sea  is  between  Asia  and  Africa  ? 
What  long  sea  is  west  of  Asia  ?  What 
two  seas  are  between  Asia  and  Europe  ? 
Name  three  seas  east  of  Asia.  What 
sea  is 
southeast  ? 
Name 
the  three 
great  pen- 
insulas of 
southern 
Asia. 
What  is- 
land is 

south  of  India?  Wnat  group  of  is- 
lands is  south  of  In  do-China?  What 
group  of  islands  is  southeast  of  China  ? 
What  islands  are  east  of  Asia  ? 

What  ocean  is  east  of  the  Philip- 
pines? What  sea  is  southwest  of 
Mindanao  ?  Between  the  Philippines 
and  Asia  ?  What  island  is  north  of 
Luzon  ?  To  what  country  does  it  be- 
long ?  What  group  of  islands  are 
southwest  of  the  Philippines  ?  Name 
the  most  important  of  these  islands. 
Which  is  nearest  the  Philippines? 
What  group  of  small  islands  is  south 
of  Mindanao?  What  city  in  Java  is 
the  capital  of  the  Dutch  East  Indies  ? 
In  what  direction  is  Hongkong  from 
where  you  live?  Sargon?  Singapore? 
Batavia  ? 


Tiger 


ASIA 


In  what  part  of  Asia  are  the  high 
mountains?  In  which  direction  do 
they  run?  What  empire  lies  north- 
east of  the  Himalaya  mountains? 
What  city  is  its  capital  ?  Name  two 
rivers  of  China.  What  country  is  east 
of  China  ?  What  is  its  capital  ? 
What  great  country  is  in  the  northern 
part  of  Asia  ?  Name  three  rivers  that 
now  into  the  Arctic  ocean.  What 
mountains  are  west  of  Asia  ?  To  what 
empire  does  southwestern  Asia  belong? 

What  famous  city  is  in  the  region 
east  of  the  Mediterranean  sea?  What 
country  is  between  the  Caspian  sea 
and  the  Persian  gulf  ?  What  is  its 
capital  ?  What  large  country  is  south 
of  the  Himalayas  ?  What  city  is  its 
capital  ?  On  the  delta  of  what  large 
river  is  it  situated  ?  Name  the  coun- 
tries of  Indo-China.  What  peninsula 
is  in  the  southern  part  of  Indo-China? 
What  large  city  is  at  the  end  of  this 
peninsula  ?  What  strait  is  between 
the  Malay  peninsula  and  Sumatra? 
What  small  island  belonging  to  Great 
Britain  is  south  of  China  ? 

2.  The  Countries  of  Asia 
The  East  Indies 

The  great  archipelago  between 
Asia  and  Australia  is  called  the 
East  Indies.  The  Philippines 
are  really  the  northern  part  of 
this  group.  Most  of  the  East 
Indies  belong  to  the  Dutch,  a 
people  of  Europe,  and  are  called 
the  Dutch  East  Indies.  The  sur- 
face, climate,  products,  and  peo- 
ples of  the  Dutch  East  Indies  are 
much  like  those  of  the  Philip- 
pines. 


The  most  important  of  these 
islands  are  Borneo,  Sumatra, 
Java,  Celebes,  and  the  Moluccas. 

Borneo  is  the  third  largest  is- 
land in  the  world.  Some  of  the 
Moros  came  from  Borneo.  Tim- 
ber, coffee,  rice,  pepper,  and 
tobacco  are  the  chief  products. 
Northern  and  western  Borneo 
belong  to  the  British,  a  people  of 
Europe. 

Sumatra  raises  fine  tobacco  and 
has  rich  coal  and  tin  mines. 

The  Moluccas  or  Spice  Islands 
produce  many  spices.  The  Filipi- 
nos used  to  go  to  these  islands  with 
the  Spaniards  to  fight  the  Dutch. 


Drying  coffee  in  Java 

Java  is  a  little  larger  than 
Luzon.  Thirty  million  people 
live  on  Java.  Much  of  the  world's 
coffee  comes  from  Java.  Much 
rice,  sugar-cane,  spice,  tea,  and 
tobacco  are  raised  there.  The 


72 


PHILIPPINE   GEOGRAPHY  PRIMER 


people  of  Java,  and  of  nearly  all 
the  other  East  Indies,  are  Malays. 
Most  of  them  are  Mahometans  in 
religion,  like  the  Moros.  The 
Dutch  have  taught  the  Javanese 
to  work  hard,  and  they  have  fine 
farms.  They  have  few  schools 
and  are  not  so  free  as  the 
Filipinos.  Batavia,  in  Java,  is 
the  capital  of  the  Dutch  East 
Indies. 

The  Dutch  rule  most  of  the 
East  Indies.  The  people  are 
Malays.  Tea,  coffee,  and  spices 
are  the  chief  products. 

Helps. — Where  are  the  East  Indies  ? 
To  what  nation  do  most  of  them  belong  ? 
What  are  the  chief  islands  ?  Which 
is  the  largest  island  of  the  East  Indies. 
Who  own  Borneo  ?  What  are  the 
chief  products  of  Borneo  ?  Of  Suma- 
tra ?  Of  the  Moluccas?  Tell  about 
the  size  of  Java.  The  population. 
The  products.  The  people.  Their 
religion.  Their  schools  and  govern- 
ment. What  city  is  the  capital  of  the 
Dutch  East  Indies? 

Spell.  —  Celebes,  Moluccas,  Batavia, 
Sumatra,  Javanese. 


A  sedan  chair  in  China 


The  Chinese  Empire 

The  Chinese  empire  covers 
nearly  one  fourth  of  Asia,  and 
one  fourth  of  all  the  people  in  the 
world  live  in  it. 

Tibet  is  the  western  division 
of  this  great  empire.  The  peo- 
ple live  chiefly  by  herding  sheep 
and  cattle.  Chinese  Turkestan 
and  Mongolia  are  desert  high- 
lands. The  people  are  chiefly 
herders.  Manchuria  is  a  fertile 
region  with  large  towns.  It 
produces  wheat,  millet,  and 
cattle. 

China. — The  eastern  part  of 
the  Chinese  empire  is  China. 
Most  of  China  is  a  fertile  low- 
land. The  rainfall  is  heavy. 
The  great  river  valleys  of  this 
region  are  the  home  of  one  fifth  of 
the  human  race. 

The  Yangtze  river  is  deep  and 
long,  and  the  products  of  the 
great  plain  of  China  come  down 
this  river.  The  Hoangho,  or  Yel- 
low river,  is  swift  and  muddy. 
It  often  overflows  its  banks  and 
destroys  villages. 

Shanghai,  near  the  mouth  of 
the  Yangtze  river,  is  a  great 
seaport. 

Canton  is  the  largest  city  in 
Asia.  Many  of  the  Chinese  in 
the  Philippines  came  from  Can- 
ton. Victoria,  on  the  island  of 


ASIA 


73 


Hongkong,  has  the  largest  ocean 
commerce    of    any    city   in   the 


Victoria  and  harbor  at  Hongkong 

world.  This  island  is  ruled  by 
the  British.  Victoria  has  a  large 
trade  with  the  Philippines.  The 
capital  of  the  Chinese  empire  is 
the  city  of  Peking. 

The  Chinese  belong  to  the  yel- 
low race.  Most  of  them  are 
farmers,  and  they  are  very  in- 
dustrious. Their  houses  are  usu- 
ally poor,  and  their  villages  dirty. 
Rice,  sugar,  vegetables,  tea,  silk, 
and  cotton  are  the  principal  pro- 
ducts. Beautiful  china  ware  is 
made. 

China  is  a  very  old  nation. 
The  Chinese  make  but  little  pro- 
gress, because  they  do  everything 
as  their  fathers  did.  They  rev- 
erence their  ancestors,  and  are 
ruled  by  an  emperor. 

The  Chinese  empire  is  one  of 
the  oldest  and  largest  in  the  world. 
The  Chinese  people  work  hard. 
Tea  and  silk  are  the  chief  products. 
The  people  make  little  progress. 


Helps.  —  How  much  of  Asia  does 
the  Chinese  empire  cover  ?  How 
many  people  live  in  this  empire  ?  De- 
scribe Tibet,  its  people  and  their  occu- 
pations. Describe  Mongolia  and  Chi- 
nese Turkestan.  Describe  Manchuria 
and  its  products.  Tell  about  two  great 
rivers  of  China.  Tell  about  Shanghai. 
Canton.  Hongkong.  Peking.  The 
chief  occupation  of  the  Chinese.  The 
chief  products  of  China.  Why  do  the 
Chinese  make  but  little  progress  ? 

Spell. — Yangtze,  Hoangho,  Shang- 
hai, Peking,  Turkestan,  Manchuria. 


Thousands  of  people  live  in  little  boats  on  the 
river  at  Canton 


The  Japanese  Empire 

Japan  is  a  group  of  islands 
north  of  the  Philippines.  The  area 
of  these  islands  is  a  little  more 
than  that  of  the  Philippines. 
The  surface  is  mountainous,  and 
the  coasts  are  irregular.  There 
are  many  volcanoes  in  Japan. 

There  are  so  many  Japanese 
that  nearly  all  the  good  land  is 
cultivated.  There  are  few  horses 
and  cattle.  Much  of  the  work 
is  done  by  hand. 


74 


PHILIPPINE   GEOGRAPHY   PRIMER 


Japan  produces  much  tea  and 
silk.  Rice,  wheat,  and  other 
grains  are  raised,  and  silver, 
copper,  and  coal  are  mined. 
Much  of  the  coal  used  in  the 
Philippines  comes  from  Japan. 
The  Japanese  make  many  beau- 
tiful things  of  metal,  ivory,  and 
wood.  They  make  fine  porcelain. 


A  Japanese  temple 

Tokio,  the  capital,  has  many 
temples  and  parks.  It  is  one 
of  the  great  cities  of  the  world. 
Yokohama  is  a  great  seaport. 
Nagasaki  is  the  seaport  of  Japan 
nearest  to  the  Philippines.  For 
hundreds  of  years  it  has  traded 
with  the  Philippines.  Kobe, 
Osaka,  and  Kioto  are  important 
commercial  and  manufacturing 
towns. 

Formosa  is  a  part  of  the  Japa- 
nese empire.  Most  of  the  in- 
habitants are  Chinese,  but  the 
mountain  peoples  are  Malayans. 
A  part  of  Formosa  once  belonged 
to  the  Philippines. 


Korea  is  a  peninsula  covered 
with  steep  hills  and  fertile  val- 
leys. It  has  rich  mines.  The  peo- 
ple are  like  the  Chinese.  Korea 
is  a  kingdom,  but  Japan  rules  it. 

People  and  History.  —  Most  of 
the  Japanese  belong  to  the  yel- 
low race.  For  hundreds  of  years 
they  did  not  let  foreigners  enter 
their  land.  In  1854  the  United 
States  made  Japan  allow  for- 
eigners to  enter.  Then  the  Japa- 
nese began  to  send  their  young 
men  to  Europe  and  to  America 
to  study.  They  established 
many  schools.  They  bought 
machinery  and  built  factories. 
Japan  has  become  one  of  the 
great  countries  of  the  world. 
The  Japanese  are  ruled  by  an 
emperor,  called  a  mikado.  They 
are  very  patriotic. 


Traveling  in  Japan 

Japan  is  a  group  of  mountain- 
ous islands.  The  people  are  in- 
dustrious and  intelligent.  Tea, 
silk,  coal,  and  manufactured  arti- 
cles are  exported. 


ASIA 


75 


Helps. — Where  is  Japan?  What 
is  the  area  of  Japan?  Describe  the 
surface.  Name  the  products.  Name 
an  export  to  the  Philippines.  Name 
some  of  the  manufactures.  What  is 
the  capital  of  Japan?  Name  four 
other  large  cities.  Tell  what  you  know 
about  Formosa.  Korea.  About  the 
people  and  history  of  Japan. 

Spell.  —  Porcelain,  Tokio,  Naga- 
saki, Formosa,  Japanese,  Mikado,  pa- 
triotic. 

Indo-China 

The    peninsula    of    Indo-China 

is  crossed  from  north  to  south  by 
high  mountain  ranges.  One  of 
these  mountain  ranges  running 
far  to  the  south  forms  the  Malay 
peninsula.  The  Mekong  and  the 
Irawadi  are  the  chief  rivers. 
Rice,  sugar,  tobacco,  and  spices 
are  raised.  There  are  several 
countries  in  Indo-China.  The 
people  belong  mainly  to  the  yel- 
low race. 

French  Indo-China  is  ruled  by 
France.  Its  chief  divisions  are 
Tonkin,  Anam,  Cochin- China, 
and  Cambodia.  Which  of  these 
is  nearest  the  Philippines  ?  Sai- 
gon, the  capital,  is  a  great  port. 
Much  rice  is  brought  from  Saigon 
to  Manila. 

Siam  is  a  kingdom.  The  peo- 
ple belong  chiefly  to  the  yellow 
race,  but  many  are  Malayans. 
Bangkok,  the  largest  city  of 
Indo-China,  is  the  capital  of 
Siam. 


A  temple  in  the  Malay  peninsula 


The  Straits  Settlements  and  the 
Federated  Malay  States.  —  These 
are  Malayan  countries  in  the 
southern  part  of  the  Malay  pen- 
insula and  neighboring  islands. 

They  are   

ruled 
by  the 
British. 
From  this 
region 
some  of 
the  fore- 
fathers of 
the  Filipinos  came.  The  climate 
and  products  are  much  like  those 
of  the  Philippines.  Half  the  tin 
in  the  world  comes  from  the 
Straits  Settlements.  Singapore, 
the  capital,  is  a  great  seaport. 
Most  steamers  from  Europe  to 
China,  Japan,  and  the  Philip- 
pines, stop  at  Singapore. 

Burma  belongs  to  India,  but 
the  people  and  products  are 
much  like  those  of  the  rest  of 
Indo-China.  Rangoon  is  the 
most  important  city. 

Indo-China  is  ruled  ~by  the 
French  and  English.  The  people 
are  Mongolians  and  Malayans. 
Singapore  is  a  great  seaport. 

Helps.  —  Describe  the  surface  of 
Indo-China.  The  products.  What  are 
the  divisions  of  French  Indo-China? 
What  peninsula  forms  the  southern 
part  of  Indo-China?  Who  are  the 


76 


PHILIPPINE    GEOGBAPHY   PRIMES 


people  ?  What  is  said  of  Saigon  ?  Of 
Siam  ?  Where  are  the  Straits  Settle- 
ments  and  the 
Federated  Malay 
States  ?  How  are 
they  ruled  ?  Who 
came  from  there 
long  ago?  Tell 
about  the  products. 
About  Singapore. 
About  Burma. 


Spell.  —  Mekong, 
Irawadi,  Cambodia, 
Saigon,  Bangkok, 
Singapore,  Kan- 
goon. 


A  girl  of  Burma 


India,  Southwestern  Asia,  and 
Siberia 

India.  —  Northern  India  is  a 
vast  plain  called  Hindustan. 
Southern  India  is  mostly  a  pla- 
teau called  the  Dekkan.  The 
climate  of  India  is  hot.  Some- 
times it  is  very  dry,  and  at 
other  times  there  is  much  rain. 

Most  of  the  people  of  India 
are  poor  farmers.  They  raise 
rice,  wheat,  cotton,  tea,  tobacco, 
opium,  and  many  other  products. 


In  India  are  great  coal  mines. 
The  chief  manufactures  are 
cloth,  rugs,  and  jewelry.  Large 
amounts  of  cotton,  wheat,  rice, 
and  tea  are  exported  to  England, 
and  opium  is  exported  to  China. 

Calcutta,  the  capital,  Bombay, 
and  Madras  are  the  largest  cities. 
Lucknow,  Delhi,  and  Benares  are 
noted  for  their  palaces  and  tem- 
ples. 

India  has  three  hundred  mil- 
lions of  people.  Many  of  them 
are  called  Hindus.  The  Hindus 
belong  to  the  white,  or  Caucasian, 


A  small  town  in  India 


A  temple  in  India 

race,  but  are  brown  in  color. 
The  people  of  India  speak  many 
languages,  and  are  of  many 
tribes.  They  are  divided  into 
castes,  or  classes.  Every  one 
must  follow  the  occupation  of 
his  father,  and  no  one  can  rise 
to  a  higher  class.  For  this  rea- 
son they  make  little  progress. 

The  people  of  the  island  of  Cey- 
lon are  very  much  like  the  people 


ASIA 


77 


of  India.    Rice,  coconuts,  and  tea 
are  the  chief  products  of  Ceylon. 


Picking  tea  in  Ceylon 

Once  there  were  many  little 
kingdoms  in  India. 
Nearly  two  centuries 
ago  the  English  be- 
came the  rulers  of 
,  India  and  of  Ceylon. 
They  have  done  much 
for  these  countries  by 
giving  them  better 
government. 

India  is  a  large,  hot  country, 
with  three  hundred  million  inhab- 
itants. Most  of  the  people  are 
poor  farmers.  Wheat,  cotton,  tea, 
and  rice  are  exported.  The  coun- 
try is  ruled  ~by  the  English. 

Southwestern  Asia  has  three 
plateaus.  There  are  few  rivers. 
The  climate  is  dry,  and  much  of 
the  land  is  desert.  Most  of  the 
people  belong  to  the  white  race. 
The  three  chief  countries  are  Asi- 
atic I'urkey,  Arabia,  and  Persia. 


In  Asiatic  Turkey  the  herding 
of  sheep  and  goats  is  the  chief 
occupation.  Weaving  rugs  and 
shawls  is  an  important  industry. 
Jerusalem  is  the  city  where  Jesus 
Christ  was  crucified. 

Arabia  is  mostly  a  hot  desert. 
Wandering  tribes  of  Bedouins 
live  in  tents.  They  raise  cattle 
and  the  famous  Arabian  horses. 
Coffee  and  dates  are  exported. 

Asiatic  Turkey  and  a  large 
part  of  Arabia  belong  to  the 
Turkish  empire.  The  other 
part  of  the  empire  is  in  Europe. 


A  view  of  Jerusalem 

Persia  is  more  fertile  than  Ara- 
bia. The  Persians  raise  fruits, 
wheat,  rice,  and  cotton,  and  have 
many  sheep  and  cattle.  Teheran 
is  the  capital.  The  ruler  of  Per- 
sia is  called  the  shah. 

Siberia  is  much  larger  than 
Europe.  It  covers  nearly  one 
third  of  Asia,  yet  has  fewer 
people  than  the  Philippines. 
Millions  of  horses  and  cattle, 
and  much  wheat  and  corn,  are 
raised  in  Siberia.  Great  forests 


78 


PHILIPPINE    GEOGRAPHY   PRIMER 


are  found  there.  Siberia  be- 
longs to  Russia,  a  country  of 
Europe.  The  natives  are  of  the 
yellow  race,  but  most  of  the 
people  are  Russians.  Irkutsk 
and  Tomsk  are  the  chief  cities. 
Lake  Baikal  is  the  largest  fresh- 
water lake  in  Asia  The  climate 
is  very  cold.  The  Russians  have 
built  a  great  railroad  from  St. 
Petersburg  in  Europe  to  Vladi- 
vostok in  eastern  Siberia. 

Russian  Turkestan  is  a  low- 
land. It  produces  grain  and 
cotton.  The  people  are  Tartars, 
of  the  yellow  race. 

Transcaucasia  is  a  mountain- 
ous country  belonging  to  Russia. 
Large  amounts  of  petroleum  are 
shipped  from  Baku. 

Southwestern  Asia  is  chiefly 
made  up  of  dry  plateaus.  Sibe- 
ria is  a  very  large,  cold  country, 
with  few  inhabitants. 

Helps. — What  is  northern  India 
called?  Southern  India?  What  is 
said  about  the  climate  ?  The  occupa- 
tion of  the  people  ?  What  are  the 
chief  products  ?  How  many  people 
are  in  India  ?  To  what  race  do  most 
of  them  belong  ?  Why  do  they  make 
little  progress  ?  What  is  said  about 
Ceylon  ?  About  the  cities  of  India  ? 
Who  rule  India  ? 

Describe  the  surface  of  south- 
western Asia.  Name  the  three  chief 
countries.  Of  what  race  are  the 
people  of  these  countries?  What  is 
the  chief  occupation  in  Asiatic  Tur- 
key ?  What  is  manufactured  ?  What 


famous  city  is  in  Asiatic  Turkey? 
What  are  the  people  of  Arabia  called? 
What  are  the  products  of  Arabia  ? 

Of  what  empire  are  Asiatic  Turkey 
and  Arabia  a  jpart?     What  are  the 


A  school  in  Turkey 

products  of  Persia?  What  city  is 
the  capital  ?  What  is  the  ruler  called  ? 
Tell  about  the  size  and  the  popula- 
tion of  Siberia.  What  are  the  pro- 
ducts ?  To  what  country  does  Siberia 
belong  ?  To  what  race  do  the  natives 
belong?  What  large  lake  is  in  Sibe- 
ria? What  are  the  chief  cities?  What 
is  said  of  Russian  Turkestan  ?  Of 
Transcaucasia  ? 

Spell .  —  Calcutta,  Madras,  Dekkan, 
Hindustan,  Bedouins,  Ceylon,  Jerusa- 
lem, Teheran,  Tartars. 


Review  Questions  on  Asia. — What 
part  of  all  the  land  in  the  world  is  in 
Asia?  What  part  of  the  people  of  the 
earth  live  in  Asia  ?  What  mountains 
are  in  the  center  of  Asia?  What 
plateau  north  of  the  Himalayas  ? 
What  lies  next  north  of  Tibet? 
What  great  plain  is  in  the  northern 
part  of  Asia?  What  lies  east  of 
Tibet?  Name  the  peninsulas  of 
southern  Asia. 

Tell    about    the    climate    of    Asia. 


EUROPE 


79 


What  plants  grow  in  the  north  ?  In 
the  south  ?  In  the  east  ?  In  the  is- 
lands south  of  Asia  ?  Where  are  there 
forests  in  Asia?  Name  some  of  the 
wild  animals  of  Asia.  Where  are  many 
of  the  tame  animals  found  ?  What 
people  live  in  India  and  in  the  west  of 
Asia  ?  In  the  east?  In  the  south ? 

Name  the  chief  countries  of  Asia  in 
the  order  in  which  you  have  studied 
them.  Which  country  is  nearest  the 
Philippines  ?  What  is  its  capital  ? 
Which  is  the  largest  of  the  Asiatic 
islands?  What  people  live  in  the 
Dutch  East  Indies?  What  is  their 
religion?  What  are  the  chief  pro- 
ducts ?  Which  is  the  largest  empire 
of  Asia  ?  How  many  people  are  in 


it  ?  What  are  the  chief  products  of 
China?  What  is  the  capital?  The 
largest  city?  Name  the  two  largest 
rivers.  To  what  country  do  Formosa 
and  Korea  belong  ?  What  is  the  capi- 
tal of  Japan?  What  are  the  chief 
products  ?  What  has  made  Japan 
great  ? 

Name  three  countries  of  the  penin- 
sula of  Indo-China.  Name  three 
great  cities  of  Indo-China.  How 
many  people  live  in  India  ?  Who 
rules  India  ?  In  what  country  is 
Jerusalem  ?  For  what  is  it  famous  ? 
Name  the  "  other  countries  of  south- 
western Asia.  What  three  countries 
of  Asia  belong  to  Russia  ?  Which  is 
the  largest? 


II.    EUROPE 


1.   Europe  as  a  Whole 

Surface.  —  Europe,  like  Asia, 
has  three  mountainous  penin- 
sulas in  the  south.  Name  them. 
As  in  Asia,  its  highest  mountains 
run  east  and  west,  north  of  these 
peninsulas,  and  a  great  plain 
slopes  away  from  the  mountains 
to  the  Arctic  Ocean.  Two  thirds 
of  Europe  is  in  this  great  plain 
and  in  the  smaller  plain  that 
lies  west  of  the  Alps. 

Coasts. — The  coasts  of  Europe 
are  very  irregular.  This  gives 
many  good  harbors,  and  Europe 
has  a  great  ocean  commerce. 

Climate. —  The  mountains  of 
Europe  cool  the  hot  winds  that 


blow  from  the  torrid  zone. 
Therefore  the  summers  of  north- 
ern Europe  are  not  very  hot. 
The  winters  there  are  cold.  In 
the  southern  part  of  Europe  the 
climate  is  warm  in  the  summer 
and  mild  in  the  winter,  because 
the  mountains  shut  out  the  cold 
winds  from  the  north.  The 
winds  from  the  ocean  bring 
much  rain  to  western  Europe, 
but  eastern  Europe  has  a  dry 
climate. 

Agricultural  Products. — Wheat 
and  rye  are  the  principal  grains 
of  Europe.  Famous  grapes  and 
wines  are  produced.  From  beets 
much  sugar  is  made.  The  pro- 
duction of  beet  sugar  has  low- 


EUROPE 


81 


ered  the  price  of  cane  sugar  in 
the  Philippines.  Tobacco,  flax,1 
and  silk  are  raised  in  some  parts 
of  Europe. 

Wild  Animals. — There  are  not 
many  wild  animals  in  Europe, 
because  there  are  not  many  great 
forests.  The  bear,  reindeer,  wild 

pig,  and 
wolf  are 
found . 
There  are 
many  fish 
in  the  wa- 
ters near 
the  coast. 


Polar  bear 


Industries.  —  Europe  is  the 
greatest  manufacturing  region 
in  the  world.  Many  kinds  of 
beautiful  and  useful  articles  are 
made  in  Europe.  The  manu- 
factured products  are  sold  in  all 
parts  of  the  earth.  There  is 
much  farming,  but  not  enough 
food  is  raised  to  feed  the  people. 
Much  grain  and  meat  are  brought 
from  America  and  Australia. 

People. —  Europe  contains  four 
hundred  millions  of  people — one 
fourth  of  all  the  people  in  the 
world.  They  belong  mostly  to 
the  white  race. 

Northern  Europe  has  cold 
winters,  and  southern  Europe  is 
warm.  Europe  has  good  harbors 

1 A  fine  cloth  called  linen  is  made  from 
the  fiber  of  flax. 


and  a  great  ocean  commerce. 
Manufacturing  is  the  chief  occupa- 
tion. The  population  numbers 
four  hundred  millions,  and  nearly 
all  belong  to  the  white  race. 

Helps.  —  Name  three  ways  in  which 
Europe  is  like  Asia.  Name  the  three 
peninsulas  of  southern  Europe.  How 
much  of  the  surface  of  Europe  is  in 
the  northern  and  western  plain  ? 
What  kind  of  coast  has  Europe? 
What  advantage  does  a  coast  of  this 
kind  give  a  country?  Describe  the 
climate  of  northern  Europe.  Of 
southern  Europe.  Of  western  Europe. 
Of  eastern  Europe.  Name  the  agri- 
cultural products  of  Europe.  What 
is  said  about  beet  sugar  ?  Name  the 
wild  animals  of  Europe.  What  is  the 
chief  occupation  ?  What  is  said  about 
farming?  How  many  people  live  in 
Europe  ?  To  what  race  do  they  belong  ? 

Spell. —  Alps,  seals,  whales,  regions. 
Europe 

(See  map  on  page  83.) 

Map  Questions.  —  What  ocean  is 
west  of  Europe  ?  North?  What  three 
large  seas  south  ?  What  continent 
east?  What  mountains  east  of  Eu- 
rope ?  Southeast  ?  What  mountains 
in  the  central  part  of  southern  Eu- 
rope ?  What  three  peninsulas  on  the 
south  of  Europe  ? 

What  great  country  occupies  the 
northeastern  part  of  Europe?  What 
city  is  its  capital  ?  Name  four  rivers 
of  Eussia  that  flow  south.  What 
river  flows  into  the  White  Sea  ?  Into 
the  Gulf  of  Eiga?  Name  two  Eus- 
sian  lakes.  What  sea  west  of 
Eussia?  What  river  flows  into  the 
Baltic  sea?  What  gulf  is  between 
Eussia  and  Sweden  ? 


82 


PHILIPPINE   GEOGRAPHY   PRIMER 


What  two  countries  in  northwest- 
ern Europe  ?  Name  their  capitals. 
What  country  south  of  Norway  and 
Sweden  ?  What  is  its  capital  ?  What 
sea  west  of  Denmark  ?  What  country 
southeast  of  Denmark?  What  is  its 
capital  ?  What  two  small  countries 
west  of  the  German  Empire  ?  Name 
their  capitals.  What  islands  north- 
west of  Holland  and  Belgium  ?  What 
city  in  England  is  the  capital  of  the 
British  empire  ?  What  is  the  capital 
of  Scotland?  Of  Ireland?  What 
great  seaport  is  on  the  west  coast  of 
England  ?  What  country 
south  of  the  British  Isles  ? 
What  city  is  its  capital  ? 

What  two  countries 
occupy  the  southwestern 
peninsula  of  Europe  ? 
Name  their  capitals. 
What  mountains  between 
France  and  Spain  ?  What 
small  mountainous  coun- 
try is  east  of  France  ? 
The  highest  mountain  in 
Europe  is  in  this  coun- 
try. What  is  its  name? 
What  river  runs  north 
from  the  Alps  mountains 
to  the  North  sea  ?  South- 
west to  the  Gulf  of  Lyon  ?  Southeast 
to  the  Adriatic  sea  ?  East  to  the 
Black  sea  ? 

What  country  southeast  of  Switzer- 
land? What  is  its  capital?  What 
country  east  of  Switzerland  ?  What 
is  its  capital  ?  Name  three  small 
countries  south  of  Austria-Hungary. 
What  sea  is  southeast  of  Italy  ? 
What  country  is  east  of  the  Ionian 
sea  ?  What  is  its  capital  ?  What  sea 
east  of  Greece  ?  What  country  north 
and  east  of  this  sea  ?  What  is  its 
capital  ?  On  what  strait  is  Constan- 
tinople situated  ? 


2.  The  Countries  of  Europe 

Russia  and  the  Northwestern 
Countries 

Russia.  —  This  country  is  as 
large  as  the  rest  of  Europe.  The 
whole  country  is  a  vast  plain,  and 
farming  is  the  chief  occupation. 
Wheat,  flax,  and  rye  are  the  great 
crops.  Many  cattle,  sheep,  and 
horses  are  raised.  Wheat  and 
petroleum  are  the  chief  exports. 


A  view  in  Moscow 

The  most  important  cities  are 

Odessa,  in  the  south,  Moscow,  in 

the  interior,  and  St.  Petersburg, 

the    capital,   in    the   north.     St. 

Petersburg  is  farther  north  than 

any  other  large  city  in  the  world. 

Eussia  is  an  empire.     The  ruler 

is  called  the  czar.     Most  of  the 

people  are  poor  and  ignorant,  and 

have  little  part  in  the  government. 

Norway    and   Sweden.  —  These 
countries  are  full  of  mountains 


84 


PHILIPPINE    GEOGRAPHY   PRIMER 


and  forests,  and  have  a  cold 
climate.  The  people  of  the  two 
countries  are  much  alike.  Nor- 
way sends  lumber  to  other  parts 
of  Europe,  and  much  iron  is 
mined  in  Sweden.  There  is  much 
fishing,  but  little  farming  in  these 
countries.  Why  ?  Both  Norway 
and  Sweden  are  kingdoms. 


A  view  in  Norway 

Denmark.  — This  little  country 
owns  the  islands  of  Iceland  and 
Greenland.  Greenland  is  the 
largest  island  in  the  world.  The 
people  of  Denmark  are  called 
Danes.  They  are  sailors,  fisher- 
men, and  farmers.  Four  fifths  of 
the  land  is  cultivated.  Denmark 
is  a  kingdom,  but  the  people 
have  much  freedom. 

The  Danes  are  relatives  of  the 
inhabitants  of  Norway  and  Swe- 
den. The  people  of  all  these 
countries  are  brave  and  intelli- 
gent. Long  ago  they  were 
famous  sailors  and  fighters.  They 
conquered  England  and  northern 
France,  and  discovered  America 


many  hundreds  of   years  before 
Columbus  lived. 

Russia  is  a  vast  plain.  Most 
of  the  people  are  ignorant  farmers. 
The  people  of  Norway,  Sweden, 
and  Denmark  have  been  famous 
sailors. 

Helps.  —  How  large  is  Russia  ? 
What  part  of  this  empire  is  in  Asia  ? 
What  is  the  chief  occupation  of  the 
people  ?  The  products  ?  Name  the 
three  chief  cities.  What  is  said  of 
the  government  ?  Of  the  people  ? 
Describe  the  surface  of  Norway  and 
Sweden.  What  are  the  products? 
What  kind  of  government  have  they  ? 
What  two  islands  belong  to  Den- 
mark ?  What  occupations  have  the 
people  ?  What  kind  of  government 
has  Denmark?  For  what  are  the 
people  of  northwestern  Europe  famous 
in  history? 

Spell.  —  Moscow,  St.  Petersburg, 
Sweden,  Denmark,  Iceland. 


People  from  the  most  northern  part  of  Europe 

The  German  Empire  and  Austria- 
Hungary 

Northern  Germany  is  a  plain 
across  which  most  of  the  rivers 
run  to  the  north.  Which  way, 


EUROPE 


85 


then,  does  the  land  slope?  In 
the  south  there  are  mountains 
with  mines  of  coal,  iron,  and  zinc. 


A  view  on  the  Rhine 


The  valley  of  the  Rhine  river 
produces  famous  grapes  and  wines. 
Rye,  potatoes,  and  beets  are  im- 
portant crops.  Germany  is  a 
great  manufacturing  country. 
Toys  for  children  in  all  parts  of 
the  world  are  made  in  Germany. 
Many  cannon  and  other  things 
made  from  iron  are  manufactured 
there. 

Some  of  the  most  famous 
schools  and  universities  of  the 
world  are  in  Germany.  The 
Germans  are  fine  musicians  and 
artists.  Berlin,  the  capital,  is 
famous  for  its  beautiful  build- 
ings and  streets,  and  its  great 


university.  Hamburg  is  a  great 
commercial  port.  Leipsic  is  the 
greatest  book  market  of  Europe. 

Germany  is  an  empire  made  of 
small  kingdoms.  It  is  noted  for 
its  schools,  manufactures,  and  art. 

Austria-Hungary. — The  empire 
of  Austria-Hungary  is  a  union  of 
two  countries.  Most  of  the 
Austrians  are  Germans  in  race 
and  speech.  In  Hungary  there 
are  several  peoples,  most  of  whom 
belong  to  the  yellow  race.  The 
people  of  the  different  parts  of 
the  empire  often  quarrel.  Why  ? 

The  products  of  Austria  are 
like  those  of  Germany.  There 
is  also  much  tobacco  grown.  The 


A  street  in  Vienna 


One  of  the  gates  of  Berlin 


government  raises  and  sells  the 
tobacco  just  as  the  government 
once  did  in  the  Philippines. 

Vienna,  the  capital  of  Austria- 
Hungary,  is  very  large,  and  is 
one  of  the  most  beautiful  cities  in 
the  world.  Fine  furniture  is 
made  in  Vienna,  and  some  of  it 
is  sent  to  the  Philippines. 


PHILIPPINE   GEOGRAPHY   PRIMER 


Hungary  is  less  hilly  than 
Austria.  It  has  rolling,  grassy 
plains  on  which  great  herds  of 
horses  feed.  Wheat,  tobacco,  and 
grapes  are  other  important  pro- 
ducts. Budapest  is  the  capital. 

Austria- Hungary  is  inhabited 
~by  several  peoples.  Most  of  them 
are  Germans.  1  hey  are  farmers 
and  manufacturers. 

Helps.  —  Describe  the  surface  of 
Germany.  Name  some  agricultural 
products.  Some  products  of  the  mines. 
What  is  said  of  the  manufactures? 
Of  the  schools  ?  For  what  is  Berlin 
famous  ?  Hamburg  ?  Leipsic  ?  Who 
are  the  Austrians  ?  The  Hungarians  ? 
What  are  the  products  of  Austria? 
What  does  the  government  raise  and 
sell  ?  What  is  the  chief  city  of  Aus- 
tria? What  is  said 
of  it?  Name  a 
manufactured  ar- 
ticle that  is  sent 
to  the  Philippines 
from  Vienna.  De- 
scribe the  surface 
of  Hungary.  The 
products. 

Spell. — Austria, 
Hungary,  Vienna, 
Hamburg,  Leipsic. 


Swiss  children 


Switzerland  and   the   Low  Coun- 
tries 

Switzerland  is  a  country  of 
mountains  and  lakes.  Most  of 
the  Swiss  live  in  the  grassy 
mountain  valleys.  They  raise 
cattle  and  make  famous  wood 
carvings,  fine  watches,  and  silks. 


Because  of  its  beautiful  scenery, 
more  than  a  million  and  a  half 
people  visit  Switzerland  every 
year.  Taking  care  of  these 
travelers  is  a  very  important 
occupation.  The  two  greatest 


Zurich 


cities  are  Zurich  and  Geneva. 
Berne  is  the  capital.  Switzer- 
land is  a  very  old  republic. 

Switzerland  is  a  small  moun- 
tain republic.  The  people  live  by 
raising  cattle,  ~by  manufactures, 
and  l)y  caring  for  travelers. 


Scene  in  Holland 

Holland  is  often  called  The 
Netherlands;  that  means  "the low- 
lands." A  part  of  the  country  is 
below  the  level  of  the  sea.  What 
do  you  think  keeps  out  the  water  ? 


EUROPE 


87 


A  little  Dutch  girl 


Two  thirds  of  the  land  is  culti- 
vated. Cattle  raising  is  one  of 
the  chief  occupations. 

Holland  has  many  people  in  a 
small  country.  It  is  less  than 
one  third  as  large  as  Luzon,  yet  it 
has  more  inhab- 
itants. It  is  a 
kingdom,  but 
the  people  have 
much  power. 
They  are  like 
the  Germans  in 
race'.  The  Hol- 
landers are  of  ten 
called  the 
Dutch.  There 
are  many  more 
people  in  the  Dutch  colonies  than 
in  Holland.  Where  are  some  of 
these  colonies  ? 

Rotterdam  is  a  great  port. 
The  Hague  is  the  capital.  Here 
a  court  meets  that  judges  between 
nations. 

Holland  is  a  small  ~but  famous 
country.  Its  people  have  great 
colonies  in  Asia.  They  rule  most 
of  the  brown  race. 

Belgium  is  flat  and  low,  like 
Holland.  It  is  the  most  thickly 
populated  country  of  Europe. 
It  is  ab6ut  one  fourth  as  large  as 
Luzon,  but  has  nearly  as  many 
people  as  all  the  Philippines. 

All  of  Belgium  is  like  a  garden. 
Grain  and  vegetables  are  grown 


and  much  flax.  Fine  linen  cloth 
and  laces  are  made  from  the  flax 
fiber.  In  the  south  are  mines  of 
coal  and  iron.  Brussels,  the  capi- 
tal, and  Antwerp,  are  great  cities. 
Belgium  is  a  kingdom.  The 
Kongo  State,  in  Africa,  is  a 
colony  ruled  by  the  king  of 
Belgium. 

Belgium  is  like  Holland,  but 
has  more  manufactures. 

Helps.  —  Switzerland.  —  Describe  the 
surface  of  Switzerland.  What  do  the 
people  raise  ?  What  do  they  manu- 
facture ?  Name  another  occupation. 
Why  do  people  visit  Switzerland? 
What  are  the  chief  cities  ?  What  kind 
of  a  government  has  Switzerland? 

Holland.  —  What  is  another  name 
for  Holland  ?  Describe  the  surface. 
What  is  one  of  the  chief  occupations  ? 
How  large  is  Holland  ?  What  is  the 
population  ?  What  are  the  people 
called  ?  Name  two  of  the  cities. 
What  is  said  of  the  government  ? 

Belgium.  —  Describe  the  surface. 
What  is  said  of  the  population  ?  Of 
the  people?  Name  the  products. 
The  large  cities.  What  kind  of 
a  government 
has  Belgium? 
What  colony 
in  Africa  is 
ruled  by  the 
king  of  Bel- 
gium? 


Spell.- 

Dutch, 
Netherlands, 
Hague.  Am- 
sterdam, Brus- 

sels,    Antwerp. 


of  Belg.um 
spinning 


88 


PHILIPPINE   GEOGRAPHY   PRIMER 


France 

The  French  call  their  country 
"beautiful  France."  It  is  about 
twice  as  large  as  the  Philippines. 
It  has  a  moist  climate,  and  its 
soil  is  the  richest  of  western 
Europe.  France  is  well  drained 
by  rivers  and  canals.  Most  of 
the  country  is  a  rolling  plain.1 
The  products  of  this  plain  are 
like  those  of  Germany.  Grapes 
and  the  olive  flourish  in  the 
south.  Wine  and  oil,  two  great 
exports  of  France,  are  made 
from  them.  France  makes  more 
wine  than  any  other  country. 

The  French  are  famous  in 
music  and  art.  They  make  beau- 
tiful silks,  laces,  and  pottery. 
Coal  and  iron  are  mined  and  fine 
machinery  is  manufactured. 


and  Havre  are  seaports  with  a 
great  ocean  commerce.  Most  of 
the  copra  of  the  Philippines  is 


A  street  in  Paris 


A  public  garden  in  Paris 

Paris,  the  capital,  is  the  most 
beautiful  large  city  in  the  world. 
It  is  the  third  of  all  cities  in  size. 
The  finest  theaters  in  the  world 
are  found  in  Paris.  Marseilles 

1 A  rolling  plain  is  a  plain  that  has 
gentle  slopes  and  small  hills. 


sent  to  Marseilles.  Lyons  is  the 
second  city  of  France.  More  silk 
is  sold  here  than  in  any  other 
city  in  the  world. 

France  has  colonies  in  every 
continent,  except  Australia,  and 
in  many  islands  of  the  sea. 
There  is  a  great  French  colony 
near  the  Philippines.  What  is  it? 

France  is  a  republic.  It  is 
the  only  great  republic  in  Europe. 

France  is  famous  for  manufac- 
tures and  art.  It  has  colonies  in 
five  continents. 

Helps. — What  do  the  French  call 
their  country  ?  How  large  is  France  ? 
What  is  said  of  the  climate  and  soil 
of  France  ?  What  are  some  of  the 
products  ?  For  what  are  the  French 
famous  ?  What  do  they  make  ?  What 
is  mined  ?  Name  an  important  manu- 
factured article.  What  is  the  capital 
of  France?  How  large  is  Paris  ? 
For  what  is  it  famous?  Name  two 
seaports.  For  what  is  Lyons  famous? 

Spell.  —  Marseilles,  Havre,  Lyons, 
theater. 


EUROPE 


89 


Spain  and  Portugal 

The  Spanish  peninsula  is  a  high 
plateau  with  many  mountain 
ranges.  Much  of  the  plateau 
has  little  rain.  Most  of  the 
people  live  along  the  coast  and 
in  the  river  valleys. 

The  climate  of  southern  Spain 
is  one  of  the  warmest  in  Europe. 
Hot  winds  come  from  Africa. 
The  mountains  keep  away  the 
cold  winds  from  the  north.  In 
the  north  and  west,  the  climate 
is  moist  and  equable. 

There  are  great  herds  of  sheep 
and  goats.  Olives,  oranges,  and 


Madrid    has    fine    pictures    and 
palaces,  but   few    manufactures. 


Orange  trees  at  Cordova 

grapes  are  plentiful.  There  are 
rich  mines  of  copper,  lead,  iron, 
and  mercury.  The  most  valuable 
mines  are  those  of  mercury. 
More  of  this  metal  is  produced  in 
Spain  than  in  any  other  country. 
Madrid,  the  capital  of  Spain, 
is  near  the  center  of  the  plateau. 


Palace  of  the  king  of  Spain 

Barcelona  is  the  greatest  commer- 
cial city  of  Spain.  Cadiz  is  a 
great  seaport.  Seville  is  the  city 
from  which  Magellan  sailed  for 
the  Philippines. 

The  products  of  Portugal  are 
much  like  those  of  Spain.  Cork 
and  wines  are  the  chief  exports. 
Lisbon,  the  capital,  and  Oporto 
are  the  chief  cities.  The  Spaniards 
and  the  Portuguese  are  much  alike 
in  race  and  language,  but  the 
common  people  have  little  educa- 
tion. 

History     and     Government.  — 

Spain  and  Portugal  are  king- 
doms. A  few  hundred  years  ago 
they  were  among  the  most  power- 
ful nations.  Their  sailors  were 
famous.  Magellan,  a  Portuguese, 
sailing  in  Spanish  ships,  found  the 
Philippines.  Spain  and  Portugal 
once  had  as  colonies  nearly  all  of 
North  and  South  America,  and 
parts  of  Asia  and  Africa.  They 
have  lost  most  of  their  colonies. 


90 


PHILIPPINE   GEOGRAPHY  PRIMER 


Spain  and  Portugal  once  had 
great  colonies,  but  have  lost  them. 
The  common  people  are  indus- 
trious, but  have  little  education. 

Helps.  —  What  is  said  of  the  people 
of  Spain  and  Portugal  ?  Of  the  sur- 
face of  the  Spanish  peninsula  ?  Of 
the  climate  of  southern  Spain?  Of 
northern  and  western  Spain  ?  What 
are  the  products  of  Spain  ?  What 
mines  are  in  Spain  ?  What  is  the 
capital?  Name  three  other  cities. 
What  are  the  products  of  Portugal  ? 
The  two  chief  cities  ?  What  kind  of 
governments  have  Spain  and  Portugal  ? 
Tell  something  of  their  history. 

Spell.  —  Portuguese,  Seville,  mer- 
cury, powerful. 

Italy  and  Greece 

Italy  is  a  warm  and  fertile  pen- 
insula. It  is  a  little  smaller  than 
the  Philippines,  but  has  four  times 
as  many  people.  In  the  northern 
part  of  Italy  are  high  mountains. 
From  these  northern  mountains 
another  range  runs  through  the 
peninsula  to  the  island  of  Sicily, 
far  to  the  south.  In  the  northeast 
is  the  broad,  fertile  valley  of  the 
Po  river,  and  on  the  west  is 
a  coastal  plain.  Italy  has  a 

long  sea- 
coast,  but 
has  few 
ships,  be- 
cause 
there  are 
few  good 
harbors. 


Cattle  are  raised  in  northern 
Italy.  Rice,  fruits,  and  silk  are 
important  products.  Italy  is  the 
second  country  of  the  world  in 
the  production  of  wine. 


Milan  cathedral 


Rome  is  the  capital.  It  was 
built  nearly  three  thousand  years 
ago.  The  Pope  lives  at"  Rome. 
The  finest  ruins  of  Europe  are 
found  there.  Two  thousand 
years  ago  the  Italians  ruled  nearly 
all  the  civilized  world. 


Naples  and  Vesuvius 


Farming  in 


Naples  is  the  largest  city  of 
Italy  and  the  greatest  in  com- 
merce. Near  Naples  is  Vesuvius, 
a  famous  volcano. 


EUROPE 


91 


Venice  is  a  city  built  on  many 
islands,  and  its  people  go  about  in 


A  street  in  Venice 

boats.     Columbus,    who     discov- 
ered America,  was  born  in  Genoa. 

Italy  has  a  warm  climate  and  a 
large  population.  Fruits,  silk,  and 
wine  are  exported.  Rome  was 
once  the  capital  of  a  world  empire. 
Italy  is  famous  for  its  art 

Greece.  —  The  kingdom  of 
Greece  is  a  mountainous  penin- 
sula. Grapes,  figs,  and  olives  are 
the  chief  products.  Long  ago 
Greece  was  a  great  empire ;  now 
she  has  lost  most  of  her  lands  and 
power.  Athens,  the  capital,  is 
famous  for  its  ruins  of  great 
temples.  Much  of  the  art  and 
learning  of  Europe  came  from 
Greece. 

Greece  is  mountainous.  It  was 
once  a  great  empire.  Athens  ivas 
famous  for  art  and  learning. 

Helps.  —  Italy.  —  What  kind  of  a  cli- 
mate has  Italy  ?  Compare  Italy  with 
the  Philippines  in  size.  In  popula- 
tion. Where  are  the  mountains  ? 


The  valley  of  the  Po  ?  A  coastal 
plain  ?  What  is  said  of  the  seacoast 
and  harbors?  Name  the  chief  pro- 
ducts of  Italy.  What  city  is  the  cap- 
ital ?  Who  lives  at  Rome  ?  Why  is 
Rome  famous  in  history  ? 

What  is  the  largest  city  in  Italy? 
Name  other  cities.  How  does  Venice 
differ  from  other  cities  ?  Who  was 
born  at  Genoa?  For  what  is  Italy 
famous  ?  To  what  country  do  many 
Italians  go  ? 

Greece.  —  Describe  the  surface  of 
Greece.  What  are  the  products? 
Tell  about  the  history  of  Greece. 
What  city  is  the  capital  ?  For  what 
is  it  famous?  What  has  Europe  ob- 
tained from  Greece  ? 

Spell.  —  Naples,  Venice,  Genoa, 
Italians,  Athens. 


Ruins  of  a  beautiful  temple  in  Athens 

The  Turkish  Empire 

The  Turks  came  into  Europe 
from  Asia.  They  now  rule  lands 
in  Asia,  Africa,  and  Europe. 
What  country  of  the  Turkish 
empire  in  Asia  have  you  studied  ? 
The  Turks  are  Mahometans. 
Nearly  all  the  other  people  of 
Europe  are  Christians. 


92 


PHILIPPINE   GEOGRAPHY  PRIMER 


In  European  Turkey  the  soil  is 
fertile,  and  farming  is  the  princi- 
pal occupation  ;  but  the  govern- 
ment is  bad,  and  the  land  is  poorly 
cultivated.  The  ruler  is  called 


A  mosque  at  Constantinople 

the  sultan.  The  capital,  Con- 
stantinople, is  a  beautiful  city. 
Why  has  it  a  fine  situation  for 
commerce  ? 

The  Turks  are  Mahometans. 
Farming  is  the  chief  occupation  in 
European  Turkey.  The  govern- 
ment is  bad. 

Helps.  —  What  is  the  religion  of  the 
Turks  ?  Their  chief  business  ?  In 
what  continents  do  they  rule  lands  ? 
What  is  the  ruler  called  ?  What  city 
is  the  capital  ? 

Spell.  —  European,  Constantinople, 
situation,  business,  commerce. 

Great  Britain 

The  British  Isles  include  Eng- 
land, Scotland,  Wales,  and  Ire- 
land. Their  area  is  a  little  more 
than  that  of  the  Philippines. 


Forty  millions  of  the  white  race 
live  in  the  British  Isles.  Most 
of  them  are  English.  There  are 
no  very  high  mountains.  The 
great  forests  have  been  cut  down. 
The  British  empire  is  the 
greatest  that  the  world  has  ever 
seen.  One  fifth  of  all  the  land, 
and  one  fifth  of  all  the  people  in 
the  world,  belong  to  the  British 
empire.  In  Asia,  Great  Britain 
rules  India  and  some  smaller 
countries.  Nearly  half  of  North 
America  and  all  of  Australia  be- 
long to  her.  Many  parts  of 
Africa  are  British.  How  did  the 
British  get  this  great  empire  ? 


One  of  the  palaces  of  the  king  of  England 

Situation.  —  One  reason  why 
the  British  empire  has  become  so 
great  is  because  the  British  Isles 
are  surrounded  by  the  ocean. 
Many  of  the  people  were  sailors 
and  fishermen.  These  men  be- 
came the  discoverers  and  con- 
querors of  new  lands. 

Products.  —  Another  cause  oi 
the  growth  of  Great  Britain  is 


EUROPE 


93 


the  nature  of  her  products.  The 
climate  is  moist,  but  the  soil  is  not 
so  fertile  as  that  of  some  coun- 
tries. There  is  some  farming,  but 
not  enough  to  support  so  many 
people.  But  there  are  great 
mines  of  coal  and  iron.  The 
coal  and  iron  and  manufactures 
of  iron  are  sent  all  over  the  world 
in  British  ships.  The  British 
build  many  steel  warships  and 
make  many  guns.  With  these 
Great  Britain  gained  and  holds 
her  empire.  The  British  have 
more  ships  than  any  other  people. 

Men.  —  Besides  these  things,  a 
great  country  must  have  indus- 
trious and  intelligent  men.  Eng- 
land has  such  men.  Many  great 
inventions,  such  as  the  railway 
engine,  were  made  by  English- 
men, and  old  and  famous  univer- 
sities and  schools  are  in  England. 


is  made.  Liverpool,  the  second 
largest  city  in  Great  Britain,  is  a 
great  commercial  port. 

London,  the  capital,  is  the 
largest  city  in  the  world.  There 
are  seven  millions  of  people  in 
and  near  London.  More  ships  go 
to  that  city  than  to  any  other 
port  in  the  world.  Much  of  the 
Philippine  sugar  and  tobacco  is 
sent  to  London.  The  people  of 
London  own  mines,  ships,  and 
railroads  in  almost  every  country 
in  the  world. 

Glasgow  is  the  largest  city  of 
Scotland.  More  steamships  are 
made  in  Glasgow  than  in  any 
other  city.  Edinburgh  is  a  fa- 
mous city. 


Ships  at  Liverpool 

Cities.  —  Great  Britain  is,  then, 
a  manufacturing  country.  The 
weaving  of  cotton  and  of  woolen 
cloth  is  one  of  her  chief  indus- 
tries. Leeds  and  Manchester  are 
the  cities  where  most  of  the  cloth 


A  house  in  Ireland 

Ireland  is  a  poor  country. 
Millions  of  Irish  have  gone  to 
the  United  States.  Dublin  and 
Belfast  are  the  chief  cities. 

The  British  empire  is  the  great- 
est in  the  world.  Its  situation 
and  products,  and  the  intelligence 
and  industry  of  its  people,  have 
made  it  great. 


94 


PHILIPPINE  GEOGRAPHY   PRIMER 


Helps.  —  How  large  are  the  British 
Isles  ?  Name  them.  How  many  peo- 
ple have  they  ?  Of  what  race  are  the 
people  ?  Describe  the  surface  of  Great 
Britain.  How  large  is  the  British  em- 
pire ?  How  many  people  are  in  it? 
Name  some  of  the  countries  of  the 
world  that  belong  to  Great  Britain. 
Name  three  things  that  helped  to 
make  the  British  empire  great. 

What  is  the  chief  industry  in  Eng- 
land ?  Name  two  cloth-weaving  cities. 
A  great  commercial  city.  The  largest 
city  in  Great  Britain.  What  is  said 
about  London?  Name  two  Scotch 
cities.  What  is  said  about  the  people 
of  Ireland?  Name  some  Irish  cities. 

Spell. — Leeds,  Manchester,  Glasgow, 
Edinburgh,  conqueror. 


Review  Questions  on  Europe.  —  How 
many  people   in    Europe  ?     Of   what 


race  are  they  ?  Name  the  countries  of 
Europe  in  the  order  in  which  you  have 
studied  them.  What  countries  of 
Europe  have  a  cold  climate?  Warm 
climate  ?  What  is  the  largest  city  of 
Europe  ?  The  second  largest  ?  What 
city  is  the  greatest  silk  market  in  the 
world  ?  In  what  country  are  many 
toys  made  ?  Where  are  many  watches 
made  ?  In  what  country  is  the  most 
wine  produced  ?  Which  country  is 
famous  for  its  universities  ?  Which 
country  is  very  low  ?  WThich  country 
is  very  mountainous?  Name  two  re- 
publics in  Europe.  In  which  city 
does  the  Pope  live  ?  From  what  city 
did  Magellan  sail  ?  Of  what  country 
is  the  czar  the  ruler  ?  The  sultan  ? 
Which  is  the  greatest  empire  of  the 
world  ?  What  made  it  great  ?  Which 
country  of  Europe  conquered  the  Phil- 
ippines ? 


III.     NORTH   AMERICA 


1.     North  America  as  a  Whole 

Surface. — A  great  plain  extends 
from  the  Gulf  of  Mexico  to  the 
Arctic  ocean.  It  is  one  of  the 
largest  plains  in  the  world.  Near 
the  center  of  this  plain  are  the 
Great  Lakes.  On  its  west  is  the 
western  highland.  The  Rocky 
mountains  are  its  chief  mountain 
system.  West  of  the  highland 
lie  the  Cascade,  Sierra  Nevada, 
and  Sierra  Madre  ranges.  Then 
comes  the  Pacific  coastal  plain. 

East  of  the  great  plain  is  the 
eastern  highland.  It  consists  of 


several  plateaus  and  the  Appa- 
lachian mountains.  East  of  the 
Appalachians  is  the  Atlantic 
coastal  plain. 

Plants. — Near  the  Arctic  ocean 
no  plants  of  value  grow.  Be- 
tween the  frozen  land  and  the 
Great  Lakes  are  vast  forests. 
The  central  part  of  the  Great 
Plain  produces  all  kinds  of  grain, 
especially  wheat,  corn,  and  oats. 
In  the  southern  part  cotton, 
sugar,  tobacco,  and  rice  grow. 

In  the  most  southerly  part  of 
the  continent  are  great  forests  of 


NORTH  AMERICA 


95 


RELIEF  MAP  OF  NORTH  AMERICA 


hard  woods  and  tropical  fruits.  Animals.  —  In  the  north  lives 
Many  plants  were  brought  to  the  the  great  polar  bear,  as  white  as 
Philippines  from  this  region.  snow.  The  musk  ox  and  the 


96 


PHILIPPINE   GEOGRAPHY   PRIMER 


reindeer  also  live  in  this  cold 
region.  Farther  south  the  great 
grizzly  bear  and  the  black  bear 
live  in  the  mountains.  East  of 

the  Missis- 
sippi   few 


except  deer 
are  found. 

Musk  ox  I  II      t  h  e 

Western 

Highland  there  are  bears,  pumas, 
or  mountain  lions,  wild  sheep 
with  great  horns,  antelope,  and 
many  deer. 
The  seas 
and  rivers 
of  North 
America 
abound 

in  fisn-  Wild  sheep 

People. —  Before  the  white  men 
came    from    Europe    the  Indian 
or  the  red  race,  lived  in  America. 
Now  most  of  the  100,000,000 
people  are  of  the  white  race 
and    speak    English.     Their 
forefathers  came  from  Europe 
about  four  hundred  years  ago. 
They  rule  the  other  races  of 
the   continent.      They   have 
many  fine  cities,  churches,  and 
schools.       They    mine    great 
quantites  of  coal,  iron,  silver, 
gold,  and  copper.     They  have 
great  manfactures  of  all  kinds, 


many  railroads,  and  a  great  com- 
merce. Most  of  the  inhabitants 
live  in  the  southern  part  of  the 
north  temperate  zone. 

North  America  has  a  great 
central  plain  and  an  eastern  and 
a  western  highland.  Valuable  min- 
erals and  metals  are  mined.  Most 
of  the  people  are  white  and  speak 
English. 

Helps.  - 
Describe 
the  surface 
of  the  cen- 
tral  part 
of  Xorth 
Ame  r  ic  a 
between  the  Arctic  ocean  and  the 
Gulf  of  Mexico.  What  lies  near  the 
center  of  the  Great  Plain  ?  What  is 
west  of  the  Great  Plain?  East  of 
the  Great  Plain?  Where  are  the 
coastal  plains?  What  plants  grow- 
north  of  the  Great  Lakes  ?  What  are 
the  products  of  the  central  plain  ? 
Of  the  southern  plain?  Of  the  east- 
ern plain  ?  Of  the  western  plain  ? 
Of  the  southern  plateau  ? 


Grizzly  bear 


A  North  American  schoolhouse 


NORTH    AMERICA. 


$8:  :,  :  ,  :  .  ,     :  :  PHILIPPINE   GEOGRAPHY  PRIMER 


Of  what  races  are  the  people  of 
North  America  ?  What  is  the  popula- 
tion? In  what  part  do  most  of  the 
white  people  live?  What  do  these 
people  do? 

North  America 

(See  map  on  page  97.) 

Map  Questions.  —  W^hat  ocean  is 
north  of  North  America  ?  East  of 
North  America?  West  of  North 
America  ?  WThat  large  island  is  north- 
east of  North  America  ?  What  group 
of  islands  is  southeast  ?  WThat  conti- 
nent is  close  to  North  America  on  the 
northwest?  What  continent  is  south 
of  North  America  ? 

What  large  country  in  the  northern 
part  of  North  America?  What  is  its 
capital  ?  What  country  is  in  the  cen- 
tral part  of  it  ?  What  city  is  its  capi- 
tal ?  What  country  is  south  of  the 
United  States  ?  Name  its  capital. 

WThat  part  of  North  America  lies 
south  of  Mexico  ?  Of  what  country 
is  Alaska  a  part  ? 

What  strait  is  between  Alaska  and 
Asia?  What  bay  is  between  North 
America  and  Greenland  ?  What  strait  ? 
What  large  bay  is  east  of  the  Dominion 
of  Canada?  What  gulf  is  south  of 
the  United  States  ?  What  sea  is  be- 
tween the  West  Indies  and  South 
America?  What  isthmus  connects 
North  and  South  America?  Name 
five  islands  of  the  West  Indies. 

Name  two  mountain  ranges  in  the 
western  part  of  North  America.  What 
mountains  in  the  eastern  part  ?  How 
many  Great  Lakes  are  there  ?  What 
river  flows  northeast  from  the  Great 
Lakes  ?  Wrhat  great  river  flows  south 
through  the  central  plain  ?  Name  three 
branches  of  this  river.  What  river 
in  Alaska?  Name  two  rivers  in  the 
western  part  of  the  United  States. 


2.    The    Countries    of   North 
America 

The  three  great  countries  of 
North  America  are  Canada,  the 
United  States,  and  Mexico.  Can- 
ada is  a  part  of  the  British  em- 
pire. The  United  States  and 
Mexico  are  republics. 

The  United  States  of  America 

Surface.  —  More  than  half  the 
country  is  low,  level  land.  The 
Pacific  coast  is  a  narrow  plain. 
The  mountains  of  this  coast  are 
near  the  sea. 

East  of  the  Pacific  Coast 
range  rise  the  snowy  peaks  of 
the  Sierra  Madre  and  Cascade 
mountains.  They  form  the  west- 
ern border  of  the  Rocky  moun- 
tain highland.  For  hundreds  of 
miles  to  the  east  of  the  Cascade 
mountains  lies  a  high  plateau, 
broken  by  mountains  and  deep 
valleys.  The  Columbia  and  the 
Colorado  rivers  cross  this  plateau. 

This  region  contains  a  few 
fertile  valleys,  but  much  of  it  is 
covered  with  barren  rocks  and 
sandy  deserts.  Many  of  the 
lakes  are  salt.  The  eastern  edge 
of  this  highland  is  about  a  mile 
above  the  level  of  the  sea. 
From  there  the  land  falls  away 
very  slowly  toward  the  great 
Mississippi  river. 

The     Mississippi      valley     is 


nearly  2000  kilometers  (1250 
miles)  wide.  The  western  part 
of  this  valley  is  called  the  great 
plains,  or  western  plains.  The 
land  on  these  plains  is  good  for 
grazing,  but  not  for  agriculture, 
because  there  is  little  rain. 

The  central  part  of  the  valley 
is  a  vast  lowland.  On  the  north, 
east,  and  south  are  forests.  South 
and  west  of  the  Great  Lakes  the 
grassy  plains  are  called  "prairies." 
The  soil  of  these  prairies  is  deep 
and  rich,  and  some  of  the  largest 
crops  of  grain  in  the  world  are 
raised  here. 

The  eastern  highland  abounds 
in  coal,  iron,  and  petroleum,  and 
has  large  forests  of  hardwood 
trees.  The  Atlantic  coastal  plain 
is  low  and  sandy.  Along  this 
coast  are  many  great  bays  and 
good  harbors.  There  are  five 
great  lakes  and  thousands  of 
smaller  ones. 

Climate.  —  The  climate  of  the 
United  States  is  temperate. 
There  are  cold  winters  in  the 
north,  and  warm  summers  both 
in  the  north  and  in  the  south. 
Rain  falls  most  abundantly  in 
the  eastern  part  of  the  country. 
The  western  plains  and  highland 
are  dry.  In  the  southwest  there 
are  great  deserts  where  it  is  very 
hot.  The  United  States  is  so 
large,  and  has  such  vast  moun- 


NORTH  AMERICA  ,,   ;     ::*/.:  ;•. ;,  :  $JJ 

tain  ranges,  that  every  kind  of 
climate  is  found  there. 

Products.  —  The  United  States 
produces  more  corn,  cotton,  and 
tobacco  than  any  other  country. 
It  cuts  more  lumber,  mines  more 
coal  and  metals,  and  produces 
more  petroleum  than  any  other 
country.  One  third  of  all  the 
manufactures  of  the  world  are 
made  in  the  United  States.  One 
half  of  all  the  railroads  of  the 
world  are  in  the  United  States. 
It  is  richer  than  any  other 
country,  and  its  people  earn  much 
more  each  year  than  those  of  any 
other  country. 


A  room  in  an  American  house 

People  and  History.  —  The 
white  people  of  the  United  States 
came  from  Europe  about  four 
hundred  years  ago.  Most  of  the 
first  settlers  came  from  England. 
They  settled  on  the  Atlantic 
coast.  In  1776  they  became 
independent  and  formed  a  new 


100: 


PHILIPPINE   GEOGRAPHY  PRIMER 


country.  The  Appalachian  moun-  government  for  all  the  states.  The 
tains,  the  fear  of  the  Indians,  highest  official  of  the  federal  gov- 
and  the  lack  of  roads,  long  kept  ernment  is  the  President.  He  is 


the  people 
on  the 
eastern 
coast.  At 
length 
they  set- 
tled the 
country 
from  ocean 
to  ocean. 
They 
bought  or 
conquered 
the  land 
of  the  In- 
dians. The 


The  Capitol  building  at  Washington 


chosen  by 
all  the  peo- 
ple once 
every  four 
years. 
Congress, 
the  body 
elected 
to  make 
laws  for 
the  whole 
country, 
meets  in 
Washing- 
ton. A 
"te  r  r  i- 


central  part  of  the  country  they 
bought  from  France.    Most  of  the 
southwestern  part  they  took  from 
Mexico  by  war  and  purchase. 
The  population  of  the  United 


tory"  is  a  part  of  the  United 
States  ruled  directly  by  the  fed- 
eral government.  Alaska  and 
the  Hawaiian  Islands  are  terri- 
tories of  the  United  States.  The 
States  is  about  eighty  millions.  Philippines  are  a  possession  or  de- 
It  is  about  thirty  times  as  large  pendency ',  of  the  United  States, 
as  the  Philippines,  and  has  ten 

times  as  many  people.  The  United  States  has  a  tem- 

perate climate,  and  great,  fertile 

Government.  —  The  United  plains.  It  is  the  richest  of  all 
States  is  made  up  of  forty-seven  countries  because  of  its  agriculture, 
states.  Each  state  has  a  governor  mines,  forests,  manufactures,  and 
and  a  government  of  its  own.  commerce.  A  fine  climate  and 
The  state  legislature  is  a  bcdy  of  rich  soil,  with  industry,  education, 
men,  elected  by  the  people,  who  and  free  government,  ham  made  it 
make  laws  for  their  own  state,  great.  Each  state  has  a  govern- 
At  Washington,  the  capital  of  the  ment,  and  there  is  a  federal  gov- 
country,  is  the  central  or  federal,  ernment  for  all  the  states. 


NORTH   AMERICA 


Helps.  —  What  are  the  three  great 
countries  of  North  America?  How 
much  of  the  United  States  is  lowland? 
Describe  the  surface  of  the  western 
highland.  What  two  great  rivers  in  it 
(see  map)  ?  Toward  what  great  river 
does  the  eastern  side  of  this  highland 
slope  ?  How  wide  is  the  Mississippi 
valley  ?  Where  in  this  valley  are  there 
forests  ?  Prairies  ?  What  are  found 
in  the  eastern  highland?  What  is  said 
about  the  Atlantic  coastal  plain  ? 

What  kind  of  climate  has  the  United 
States  ?  Where  does  the  most  rain 
fall  ?  Where  are  there  deserts  ?  From 
what  country  mainly  did  the  white 
people  come  to  America  ?  When  ? 
Where  did  they  settle?  What  three 
things  kept  them  from  settling  earlier 
in  the  West  ?  When  did  the  United 
States  become  independent?  What 
can  you  say  of  the  government  of  each 
state?  Of  the  federal  government? 
What  city  is  the  capital  of  the  United 
States  ?  What  is  Congress  ?  How  is 
the  President  chosen  ?  For  how  long  ? 
What  territories  has  the  United  States  ? 
What  dependencies  ? 

Spell.  —  Cascade,  Colorado,  Missis- 
sippi, federal,  Congress,  Washington. 

The  Groups  of  States 

(See  map  on  inside  of  back  cover  of  this  book.) 

There  are  five  groups  of  states, 
the  New  England,  the  Middle 
Atlantic,  the  Central,  the  South- 
ern, and  the  Western  states. 

The  New  England  States 

Maine,  New  Hampshire,  Vermont, 
Massachusetts,  Ehode  Island,  and 
Connecticut. 

Surface. — The  six  states  east  of 
the  Hudson  river  are  called  the 


New  England  states.  Can  you  tell 
why?  The  surface  of  this  group 
is  hilly.  There  are  many  lakes  and 
short  rivers.  Most  of  the  rivers 
have  falls  and  run  swiftly.  For 
what  can  they  be  used  ?  There 
are  many  bays  and  good  harbors. 


In  the  mountains  of  New  England 

Commerce.  —  This  part  of  the 
country  is  nearest  Europe.  Many 
large  vessels  carry  goods  from 
the  ports  of  New  England  across 
the  Atlantic.  We  can  see  that 
on  this  coast  there  must  be  many 
fishermen  and  sailors. 

Lumbering.  —  There  are  many 
ships  built,  because  there  are  large 
forests,  especially  in  the  state  of 
Maine.  The  largest  wooden  ships 
in  the  world  were  built  in  Maine. 

Manufacturing.  —  Most  great 
ships  are  made  of  iron  and  steel, 
and  many  of  them  are  made  in 
New  England.  The  people  there 
make  machinery,  and  send  it  to 
all  parts  of  the  world.  There 
are  many  factories  for  making 


GEOGRAPHY   PRIMER 


small    iron    articles,   like 
tools,  and   firearms.     New 
land   makes   more   cotton 
and  leather  shoes  than  any 
part  of  the  United  States. 


nails.  Helps.  —  Name   the  live  groups  of 

Eng-     states.      Describe   the   surface  of  the 

cloth 


other 


Where  cloth  is  woven 

Farming.  —  There  are  many 
small  farms  in  New  England.  Veg- 
etables, eggs,  butter,  and  milk  are 
produced.  In  the  valley  of  the 
Connecticut  river  much  tobacco 
is  grown. 

Cities.  —  Boston,  the  capital 
of  Massachusetts,  is  the  largest 
city  of  New  England.  It  is  the 
second  most  important  seaport 
in  the  United  States.  The  man- 
ufactures of  New  England,  and 
cattle  and  grain  from  the  west, 
are  sent  from  Boston  to  Europe 
and  to  other  countries. 

Harvard  University,  the  largest 
and  oldest  university  in  the  United 
States,  is  at  Cambridge,  near  Bos- 
ton. More  than  four  thousand 
students  attend  this  university. 

The  New  England  states  are 
hilly.  They  have  fine  harbors  and 
many  ships.  They  have  many  fac- 
tories, and  some  great  universities. 


New  England  states.  Name  these 
states.  What  is  said  of  the  coast?  Of 
the  commerce  ?  Of  lumbering  ?  Of 
manufacturing  ?  Name  some  of  the 
manufactures  of  New  England.  What 
are  the  farm  products  ?  What  is  the 
chief  city  ?  What  is  shipped  from 
Boston?  What  famous  university  is 
near  Boston? 

Spell.  —  Firearms,  leather,  Connecti- 
cut, Massachusetts,  Harvard. 

The  Middle  Atlantic  States 

New  York,  Pennsylvania,  New  Jer- 
sey, Maryland,  Delaware,  Virginia,  and 
West  Virginia. 

Surface.  —  The  mountains  of 
this  group  of  states  are  higher, 
and  the  rivers  larger,  than  those 
of  the  New  England  group. 
Name  the  three  great  bays  along 
the  coast. 


Loading  hay 

Products.  —  In  the  northern 
part  of  this  group,  grain,  hay, 
fruits,  and  vegetables  are  raised. 
In  the  southern  part  much  corn 
and  tobacco  are  grown.  The 
mountains  of  these  states  have 
rich  coal  and  iron  mines.  They 
furnish  material  for  many  fac- 


NORTH   AMERICA 


103 


Copyright,  1905,  by  Irving  Underbill. 
A  view  of  the  business  part  of  New  York  City 


tories,  and  manufacturing  is  the 
chief  occupation  of  these  states. 

New  York  State  is  called  the 
"  Empire  State,"  because  it  is 
so  great  and  rich.  This  state 
is  larger  than  Luzon.  It  has 
nearly  as  many  people  as  the 
Philippines,  and  far  more  wealth. 

New  York  City  is  the  largest 
city  in  the  United  States,  and 
the  second  largest  city  in  the 
world.  It  has  about  3,500,000 
inhabitants,  and  is  the  greatest 
manufacturing  city  in  America. 
New  York  has  a  good  harbor, 
and  many  wharves  and  ships. 


railroads  bring  manufactures 
from  smaller  cities  to  New  York. 
There  the  goods  are  loaded  upon 
ships  and  sent  to  all  parts  of 


One  of  the  great  bridges  in  New  York  City 

The  products  of  the  rich  Central 
states  are  sent  there  by  way  of 
the  Great  Lakes,  the  Erie  canal, 
and  the  Hudson  river.  Many 


A  large  engine  in  a  factory 

the  world.  Because  of  its  man- 
ufactures and  commerce,  New 
York  has  become  the  greatest 
city  of  the  Western  Hemi- 
sphere. By  and  by  it  will  be- 
come the  greatest  in  the  world. 
Philadelphia  is  a  great  man- 
ufacturing city.  Many  ships 
and  railway  engines  are  made 
there.  Baltimore  is  a  great  port 
and  commercial  city.  Pittsburg 
is  the  center  of  the  iron  industry. 
Washington  is  the  capital  of 
the  country.  The  government 


104 


PHILIPPINE   GEOGRAPHY   PRIMER 


buildings  are  among  the  finest  in 
the  world.  Thousands  of  people 
who  do  the  work  of  the  govern- 
ment live  in  Washington.  The 
most  important  laws  for  the 
Philippines  are  made  in  Washing- 
ton by  Congress. 

The  Middle  Atlantic  states  have 
many  factories  and  a  great  com- 
merce. New  York,  is  the  second 
greatest  city  in  the  ivorld.  Phila- 
delphia and  Baltimore  are  impor- 
tan  t  commercial  cities .  Washing  ton 
is  the  capital  of  the  United  States. 

Helps.  —  What  group  of  states  is 
next  west  of  the  New  England  states  ? 
Name  them.  What  is  said  of  the  sur- 
face of  this  group  ?  Of  the  coast  line  ? 
What  are  the  agricultural  products? 
The  products  of  the  mines  ?  What 
state  is  called  the  "Empire  State"? 
Why  ?  What  is  said  about  the  size  of 
New  York  City  ?  Of  its  manufactures  ? 
Why  has  New  York  a  great  commerce  ? 
Name  two  manufactures  of  Philadel- 
phia. Why  is.  Pittsburg  important  ? 
Why  is  Washington  great  ?  What  is 
done  in  Washington  that  is  of  impor- 
tance to  the  Philippines  ? 

Spell.  — New  York,  Philadelphia, 
Baltimore,  Washington. 

The    Central   States 

Ohio,  Indiana,  Illinois,  Missouri, 
Kansas,  Nebraska,  Iowa,  Michigan, 
Wisconsin,  Minnesota,  South  Dakota, 
and  North  Dakota. 

These  states  lie  in  the  great 
central  plain  between  the  Appa- 
lachian and  the  Rocky  moun- 
tains. This  group  of  states  con- 


tains half  the  people  of  the 
United  States  and  produces  most 
of  the  food  of  the  country. 
Large  amounts  of  wheat,  corn, 
and  oats,  and  many  cattle,  sheep, 


Herding  cattle  on  the  western  plains 

and  hogs  are  raised.  Coal  is 
abundant,  and  there  are  many 
factories,  railroads,  and  large 
cities.  Forests  cover  the  north- 
ern part  of  some  of  these  states. 
The  largest  furniture  factories  in 
the  world  are  in  Michigan.  Many 
ships,  both  of  wood  and  iron,  are 
made  on  the  shores  of  the  Great 
Lakes. 

Corn  is  the  greatest  crop  of  the 
United  States,  and  Ohio,  Indiana, 
Illinois,  Iowa,  Kansas,  and  Ne- 
braska form  the  great  corn  belt. 
Large  numbers  of  cattle,  hogs, 
horses,  and  sheep  are  raised  in 
these  states. 

The  part  of  the  Central  states 
that  lies  west  of  the  Mississippi 
river  is  the  greatest  wheat-pro- 
ducing region  in  the  world. 
Wheat  is  the  most  valuable  of 
grains.  The  United  States  sends 
much  wheat  to  Europe  and  Asia. 


NORTH   AMERICA 


105 


In  the  far  western  part  of  the  St.  Louis  is  the  second  city  of 
United  States  the  climate  is  too  the  Central  states  in  size  and  im- 
dry  for  wheat  to  grow  well,  portance.  It  is  at  the  junction 
Here  are  the  great  plains  where  of  two  great  rivers.  Name  them, 
millions  of  cattle,  sheep,  and  It  is  also  a  great  railroad  center, 
horses  are  raised.  Horses,  wool,,  wheat,  corn,  to- 

A  large     bacco,  and 

beer  are 
its  chief 
exports. 
Cincin- 
nati and 
Cleveland 


amount 
of  coal  is 
mined  in 
the  east- 
ern states 
of  this 
group. 
Along  the 
shores  of 
Lake  Su- 
perior are 
the  larg- 
est iron 


are  great 
manufac- 
turing cit- 
ies. .  Min- 
neapolis is 
noted  for 
its  flour 
mills. 


A  business  street  in  Chicago 

mines     in 

the  world  and  also  great  copper 
mines.  The  deepest  mine  in  the 
world  is  there.  It  goes  down 
into  the  earth  more  than  1500 

meters  (nearly  one  mile).  _,  .    .     ,  . 

<r«.          •    ,1  .,       c  per.     1  his  is  the  most  important 

Chicaqo  is  the  greatest  city  01  r  „  r 

Jt      ~     i    ,  -i  qroup  of  states. 

the  Central  states  and  the  second 

Helps.  —  Where  are  the  Central 
states  ?  Name  them.  How  many  people 
live  in  them  ?  What  do  they  raise  ? 
What  is  said  of  factories  and  railroads  ? 


The  Central  states  are  the  great 

wheat  and  corn  producing  region. 

Tliey  lead  in  cattle  raising,  and 

produce  much  coal,  iron,  and  cop- 


greatest  in  the  United  States.  It 
has  large  factories.  Thousands 
of  ships  come  to  it  from  the 


»        _  -^.  -_.       ,  -«-i      •  -| 

ports  of  the  Great  Lakes.  Kail-  what  covers  part  of  the  northern  re- 
roads  bring  much  of  the  wheat  gion  ?  Name  the  great  corn-producing 
and  many  of  the  cattle  and  hogs  states.  Where  is  the  wheat-growing 
of  the  Central  states  to  Chicago,  section?  What  are  raised  in  the 
Great  numbers  of  cattle  are  killed 
in  Chicago.  Their  meat  is  sent 


to  all  parts  of  the  world. 


western  states  of  this  group?     What 
mines  are  near  Lake  Superior  ? 

What    is   the    largest  city  of  this 
group  ?      What  has  made  it    a  great 


106 


PHILIPPINE    GEOGRAPHY   PRIMER 


city  ?  What  is  the  second  city  of  the 
Central  states  ?  What  has  made  it 
great  ?  What  are  its  exports  ?  Name 
three  other  important  cities. 

Spell.  —  Chicago,  Minneapolis. 

The   Southern    States 

North  Carolina,  South  Carolina, 
Georgia,  Florida,  Alabama,  Mississippi, 
Louisiana,  Texas,  Oklahoma,  Arkan- 
sas, Tennessee,  and  Kentucky. 

The  Appalachian  mountains 
run  through  several  of  the  South- 
ern states.  The  land  slopes  gently 
east  and  south  from  the  moun- 
tains in  a  wide  plateau.  Then 
comes  a  low  plain  that  runs  along 
the  Atlantic  and  Gulf  coasts. 


A  cotton  field 

In  the  southeast  part  of  the 
group  are  vast  forests  of  pine 
trees.  Much  lumber  is  exported. 
The  southern  group  is  a  farming 
country.  Yet  there  are  many 
manufactures  because  there  is 
much  coal  and  iron.  Cotton  is 
the  chief  crop.  Besides  cotton, 
sugar-cane,  rice,  corn,  and  some 
wheat,  are  raised  in  these  states. 
In  the  southern  part  of  the  group 
many  fruits  are  grown. 


The  finest  rice  farms  in  the 
world  are  in  Texas  and  Louisiana. 
In  the  Philippines  one  rice  farmer 
can  cultivate  by  his  own  labor 
less  than  one  hectare  of  rice  land 
a  year.  In  the  rice  fields  of 
Texas  and  Louisiana,  with  the 
help  of  machinery  and  irrigation, 
one  man  can  cultivate  fifty  hec- 
tares of  rice  land  a  year. 

Most  of  the  people  of  this 
group  are  white,  but  there  are 
about  9,000,000  Negroes.  Their 
forefathers  came  from  Africa  as 
slaves.  Now  all  the  Negroes  are 
free. 

New  Orleans  is  the  largest  city 
of  the  Southern  states.  The 
commerce  of  the  Mississsippi 
river  passes  through  this  city. 
Ocean  steamers  can  come  up  the 
river  to  New  Orleans.  Much 
cotton  is  exported. 

The   Southern    states    produce 


and 


many 


cotton,    nee,    sugar, 

cattle.     They  have  fine  mines  of 

coal  and  iron. 


Loading  cotton  at  New  Orleans 


NOKTH   AMERICA 


107 


Helps.  —  Are  the  Southern  states  in 
the  southeast  or  the  southwest  part  of 
the  country?  What  mountains  run 
through  many  of  them  ?  What  lies 
between  the  mountains  and  the  coastal 
plain  ?  What  is  the  chief  occupation 
of  the  people  of  this  group  ?  The 
chief  crop?  Name  four  other  great 
crops.  Where  are  the  best  rice  farms 
in  the  world  ?  How  much  rice  land 
can  one  farmer  in  the  Philippines  cul- 
tivate without  the  help  of  machinery  ? 
How  much  in  the  Southern  states  with 
the  help  of  machinery  ?  How  many 
Negroes  are  in  the  Southern  states  ? 
What  is  the  chief  city  of  this  group? 

Spell.  —  Southern,  sugar-cane,  irriga- 
tion, New  Orleans. 

The  Western  States 

Rocky  Mountain  Section. — Montana, 
Idaho,  Wyoming,  Colorado,  Utah,  Ne- 
vada, Arizona,  and  New  Mexico. 

Pacific  Coast  Section.  —  California, 
Oregon,  Washington. 

The  Western  states  form  the 
largest  of  all  the  groups.  One 
third  of  all  the  land  in  the 
United  States  is  in  this  group. 


Few  people  live  there.  This  is 
partly  because  there  are  many 
mountains  and  deserts,  and 
partly  because  these  states  were 
the  last  to  be  settled. 

The  Indians.  —  Many  of  the 
American  Indians  live  in  the 
states  of  this  group.  Very  few  of 
them  now  live  by  hunting  and 
fishing.  They  are  farmers  or 
sheep  raisers,  or  live  by  making 
baskets,  mats,  or  blankets.  Many 
of  them  are  fed  and  clothed  by 
the  government  for  their  lands. 


Snow-capped  mountains 


Indians  in  New  Mexico. 

Rocky  Mountain  Section.  — 
There  is  little  good  farming  land 
in  the  Rocky  Mountain  aection. 
The  soil  is  fertile,  but  there  is 
little  rain.  Most  of  this  section 
is  a  high  and  dry  plateau.  The 
great  mountain  ranges  on  the 
west  cut  off  the  rain.  Many 
cattle  and  sheep  are  raised  there. 

There  are  rich  mines  of  gold, 
silver,  copper,  and  lead  in  this 
section.  Colorado  produces  more 
gold  and  silver  than  any  other 
state.  Denver  is  the  largest  city 


108 


PHILIPPINE    GEOGRAPHY  PRIMER 


in  these  states.  Suite  is  impor- 
tant because  it  has  the  greatest 
copper  mines  in  the  world. 

The   Pacific    Coast   Section.  — 

Mountains  run  along  the  entire 
length  of  the  Pacific  coast.  Be- 
tween the  mountains  are  rich 
valleys.  Wheat,  barley,  and 
fruit  are  the  chief  products.  The 
southern  part  of  this  group  is 
the  finest  fruit-growing  country 
in  the  world.  There  are  great 
plantations  of  grapes,  oranges, 
olives,  and  other  fruits. 


An  orange  orchard  in  southern  California 

The  climate  of  southern 
California  is  mild.  There  is 
little  rain  in  that  region.  The 
farmers  bring  water  for  irriga- 
tion from  the  mountains  through 
long  canals  and  pipes.  Most  of 
the  Filipino  students  who  go  to 
the  United  States  spend  the  first 
few  months  in  California,  be- 
cause of  the  mild  climate. 

San  Francisco  is  the  largest 
city  on  the  Pacific  coast.  In 
1906  a  great  earthquake  threw 


down  many  buildings  and  caused 
fires  that  burned  a  large  part  of 
the  city.  The  people  are  build- 
ing it  again.  Most  of  the  ships 
which  come  from  the  United 
States  to .  the  Philippines  sail 
from  San  Francisco. 

Canning  salmon  is  an  impor- 
tant industry  in  the  towns  on 
Puget  sound.  Some  of  the  finest 
forests  in  the  world  are  in  this 
region.  Much  lumber  is  sent 
from  there  to  the  Philippines. 

The  Western  states  form  the 
largest  group.  There  are  fewer 
people,  in  them  than  in  either  of 
the  other  groups.  They  contain 
rich  mines  and  great  forests. 

Helps.  —  What  are  the  two  sections 
of  the  Western  states  ?  How  much 
of  the  land  of  the  United  States  is  in 
this  group  ?  Why  do  few  people  live 
there  ?  What  people  besides  the 
whites  live  in  these  states  ?  What 
occupations  have  the  Indians  ?  What 
kind  of  climate  has  the  Kocky  Moun- 
tain section?  What  is  the  chief  in- 
dustry in  these  States  ?  Which  state 
produces  the  most  gold  ?  Name  three 
other  metals  mined  in  these  states. 
Name  the  largest  city. 

Describe  the  surface  of  the  Pacific 
coast  states.  What  are  the  chief 
products  ?  What  are  the  products  of 
the  southern  part?  Name  two  ex- 
ports from  Puget  sound.  Describe 
the  climate  of  southern  California. 
Why  do  Filipino  students  remain  for 
some  time  in  California  ?  Tell  about 
San  Francisco. 

Spell.  —  Denver,  Seattle,  salmon. 


NOttTH   AMERICA 


109 


Possessions  of  the  United  States 

Alaska. —  This  great  peninsula 
was  purchased  by  the  United 
States  from  Russia.  Alaska  is 
about  five  times  as  large  as  all 
the  Philippines.  Mt.  McKinley 
(20,464  feet),  the  highest  moun- 
tain in  North  America,  is  in  south- 
ern Alaska.  The  Yukon  is  one 
of  the  great  rivers  of  the  world. 

There  is  little  agriculture. 
Why?  Gold  and  furs  are  the 
chief  products.  There  are  fine 


Eskimos  fishing  off  the  coast  of  Alaska 

salmon  fisheries.  On  the  Islands 
in  the  Bering  sea  valuable  fur 
seals  are  captured. 

The  natives  of  Alaska  are 
Eskimos  and  American  Indians. 
They  are  wild  and  poor.  Many 
American  miners  now  live  there. 

Porto  Rico.  —  This  island  of 
the  West  Indies  was  taken  from 
Spain  in  the  war  of  1898.  Its 
products  and  climate  are  much 
like  those  of  the  Philippines. 
The  people  are  Spanish,  Negro, 
or  a  mixture  of  the  two  races. 


Under  the  government  of  the 
United  States,  the  people  of 
Porto  Rico  are  more  prosperous 
than  before. 

The  Hawaiian  Islands. —  These 
islands  belong  to  the  United 
States.  The  natives  are  of 
nearly  the  same  race  as  the 
Filipinos.  They  are  few  in 
number.  Japanese  and  Chinese 
do  most  of  the  work.  Many 
Americans  live  in  the  islands. 
The  finest  sugar  plantations  in 
the  world  are  there.  Honolulu 
is  the  capital. 

The  United  States  owns  sev- 
eral of  the  Samoan  Islands. 
They  are  used  as  a  coaling  sta- 
tion for  warships.  Five  days' 
sail  east  of  the  Philippines  is 
Guam,  one  of  the  Ladrone  Is- 
lands. Guam  is  also  used  as  a 
coaling  station.  The  people  are 
like  the  Filipinos. 

Alaska  is  a  cold,  mountainous 
country.  Gold  and  furs  are 
products.  The  Hawaiian  Is- 
lands produce  much  sugar. 

Helps. —  Where  is  Alaska?  How 
large  is  it  ?  What  famous  mountain 
is  in  Alaska  ?  What  great  river  ? 
Why  is  there  little  agriculture  ?  What 
are  the  chief  products  ?  What  are 
found  in  the  seas  near  Alaska  ?  On  the 
islands  of  Bering  sea?  Who  are  the 
people  ?  Where  is  Porto  Eico  ? 
How  did  the  United  States  get  it? 
What  are  the  products  of  Porto  Kico  ? 
Tell  about  the  climate.  The  people. 


110 


PHILIPPINE    GEOGRAPHY   PRIMER 


Who  are  the  people  of  the  Hawaiian 
Islands?  What  are  the  chief  prod- 
ucts ?  What  city  is  the  capital  ? 
What  islands  in  the  south  Pacific  be- 
long to  the  United  States  ?  For  what 
are  they  used  ?  For  what  is  Guam 
used  ?  Describe  the  people. 

Review  Questions  on  the  United 
States.  —  In  what  part  of  North 
America  is  the  United  States  ?  What 
is  the  most  of  its  surface  ?  Name  the 
two  great  highlands.  Two  coastal 
plains.  The  great  valley.  Where 
are  large  forests  found  ?  The  prairies  ? 
The  western  plains  ?  Where  does  the 
most  rain  fall  ?  The  least  ? 

From  what  continent  did  the  white 
settlers  come  ?  When  ?  Where  did 
they  settle  ?  How  was  most  of  the 
country  obtained?  What  is  the  cap- 
ital? What  is  Congress?  What 
kind  of  government  has  the  United 
States  ?  What  are  the  groups  of 
states  ?  Tell  about  the  commerce  of 
New  England.  The  lumber  industry. 
Manufacturing.  Farming.  What  do 
you  know  about  Boston. 

What  is  the  chief  occupation  in  the 
Middle  Atlantic  states  ?  Tell  about 
New  York.  Why  has  it  become 
great?  What  are  manufactured  in 
Philadelphia?  Tell  about  the  busi- 
ness of  Baltimore.  Of  Pittsburg. 
Why  is  Washington  important  ? 

In  which  group  of  states  do  half 
the  people  of  the  country  live  ?  What 
are  the  great  agricultural  products  of 
the  Central  states  ?  Name  other  prod- 
ucts. What  is  the  largest  crop  of 
the  United  States  ?  Where  is  wheat 
raised  ?  Cattle  ?  Why  has  Chicago 
become  great?  What  is  the  second 
city  of  this  group  ?  Name  some  other 
cities  of  the  Central  states. 

What  are  the  products  of  the  South- 
ern states  ?  What  is  the  chief  city  ? 


Which  is  the  largest  group  of 
states  ?  What  two  sections  has  it  ? 
What  are  the  chief  products  of  the 
Rocky  Mountain  section  ?  Of  the 
Pacific  Coast  section  ?  Name  two 
cities  of  this  group.  Tell  about  the 
climate  of  California.  Name  a  great 
peninsula  that  belongs  to  the  United 
States. 

In  what  is  the  United  States  great  9 
What  made  her  great  ? 

Canada  and  Mexico 

Canada.  —  Frozen  plains  and 
barren,  ice-covered  islands  are 
found  in  northern  Canada.  The 
southern  part  is  like  the  northern 
part  of  the  United  States.  Then 
what  must  its  chief  products  be  ? 


In  the  forest  region  the  logs  are  cut  and  floated 
down  the  rivers 

Great  forests  are  found  in 
Canada.  Lumbering,  fishing, 
and  farming  are  the  great  indus- 
tries. Many  cattle  and  horses 
are  raised  on  the  western  plains 
of  Canada.  What  does  this  show 
about  the  rainfall  ?  Coal,  iron, 
copper,  and  gold  are  found  in  the 
mountains. 

There    are    fewer    people    in 


NORTH   AMERICA 


111 


Canada  than  in  the  Philippines. 
Most  of  them  are  of  English  de- 
scent. Montreal  and  Quebec  are  fa- 
mous cities.  Ottawa  is  the  capital. 
Canada  is  a  part  of  the  British 
empire.  The  governor  general 
is  appointed  by  the  king  of  Eng- 
land, but  the  people  make  their 
own  laws  and  are  free. 

Mexico  has  low  and  fertile 
coasts.  The  interior  is  a  lofty 
plateau  with  high  mountains. 
The  climate  is  moist  and  hot  in 
the  lowlands. 

The  products  of  the  lowlands 
are  much  like  those  of  the  Philip- 
pines. Sugar,  coffee,  and  cacao 
are  raised.  In  the  cool,  dry 
climate  of  the  plateau,  corn, 
wheat,  and  other  plants  of  the 
temperate  zone  are  grown.  In 
the  mountains  are  some  of  the 
richest  silver  mines  in  the  world. 

Mexico  is  now  an  independent 
republic.  The  people  are  Span- 
ish, Indians,  and  a  mixture  of 
the  two  races.  The  capital, 
Mexico,  is  a  beautiful  city  high 
above  the  sea.  Vera  Cruz  and 
Acapuko  are  the  chief  ports. 

From  Acapulco  ships  used  to 
sail  to  Manila.  Mexico  was  then 
a  colony  of  Spain.  The  Philippines 
in  those  days  were  governed  from 
the  colony  of  Mexico.  Soldiers, 
priests,  and  governors  from  the 
Philippines  came  from  Mexico. 


Helps.  —  Describe  the  northern  part 
of  Canada.  The  southern  part.  Name 
the  three  chief  industries.  An  occu- 
pation on  the  western  plains.  What  is 
found  in  the  mountains  ?  Who  are 
the  people?  Name  the  chief  cities. 
Tell  about  the  government.  Describe 


A  Mexican  cart 

the  surface  of  Mexico.  The  climate. 
Four  products  of  the  coast.  Some 
products  of  the  plateau.  What  metal 
is  found  in  Mexico?  What  kind  of 
government  has  Mexico?  Name  the 
capital.  Name  two  ports.  What  was 
Mexico  once?  Who  came  to  the 
Philippines  from  Mexico  ? 

Spell.  —  Montreal,   Quebec,  Ottawa. 

Canada  is  a  large  country  with 
few  inhabitants.  It  has  great 
forests.  Mexico  has  many  moun- 
tains and  rich  silver  mines. 

Central   America    and   the   West 
Indies 

Central  America.  —  The  sur- 
face, climate,  products,  and  peo- 
ple are  much  like  those  of  Mexico. 
The  mountains  are  covered  with 
dense  forests.  This  region  has 
five  small  republics  and  a  colony 
which  is  called  British  Honduras. 


112 


PHILIPPINE   GEOGRAPHY  PRIMER 


In  these  republics  are  frequent 
revolutions.  The  republics  are 
independent,  but  the  people  are 
not  really  free.  What  was  said 
of  freedom  in  Canada  ? 

The  West  Indies.  —  The  largest 
of  these  islands  is  Cuba.  Cuba 
is  about  as  large  as  Luzon,  but 
has  less  than  half  as  many  peo- 
ple. The  climate  and  products 
are  much  like  those  of  the  Philip- 
pines. Tobacco,  coffee,  sugar, 
and  fruits  are  the  chief  exports. 
The  people  are  Spaniards,  Ne- 
groes, and  mestizos.  Havana, 
the  capital,  is  about  the  size  of 
Manila. 

Cuba  was  discovered  by  the 
Spaniards.  Long  ago  Indians 
lived  there,  but  they  all  died 
under  Spanish  rule.  Spain 
treated  the  Cubans  unjustly. 
Finally  the  United  States  went  to 
war  with  Spain  in  1898  to  free  the 
Cubans.  The  United  States  made 
Cuba  an  independent  republic. 

Jamaica  is  a  British  colony. 
Haiti  and  Santo  Domingo  are 
Negro  republics. 

Helps.  —  Name  the  countries  of  Cen- 
tral America.  What  kind  of  govern- 
ments have  they  ?  Are  the  people 
really  free  ?  Which  is  the  largest 
island  of  the  West  Indies  ?  What  are 
the  chief  exports  ?  Who  are  its  people  ? 
What  is  its  capital  ?  Tell  something 
of  its  history.  What  did  the  United 
States  do  for  Cuba  ?  What  kind  of  gov- 
ernment has  Haiti  ?  Santo  Domingo  ? 


A  scene  in  Jamaica 

Review  Questions  on  North  America.  — 
Describe  the  surface  of  North  America. 
The  climate  of  the  northern  part.  Of 
the  southern  part.  Where  is  the  dry 
region?  What  great  country  lies  in 
the  central  part  of  North  America? 
What  kind  of  climate  has  the  United 
States?  Name  some  wild  animals  of 
North  America.  What  is  the  popula- 
tion? To  what  races  do  the  people 
belong  ? 

Name  the  countries  of  North 
America.  What  are  some  of  the  chief 
products  of  the  United  States  ?  What 
is  the  population  of  the  United  States  ? 
Name  the  five  groups  of  states.  Which 
groups  are  chiefly  manufacturing 
states  ?  Which  are  chiefly  agri- 
cultural states  ?  Where  is  mining  a 
great  industry  ?  Where  is  the  great 
fruit-growing  region  of  the  United 
States  ?  Name  the  possessions  of  the 
United  States.  Name  five  cities  in 
the  United  States  and  tell  for  what 
each  is  famous. 

What  country  north  of  the  United 
States  ?  Of  what  empire  is  it  a  part  ? 
What  country  southwest  of  the  United 
States  ?  What  white  people  first  set- 
tled there  ?  What  are  some  of  the 
products  of  Mexico  ?  Tell  something 
of  the  governments  and  products  of 
Central  America.  Of  Cuba. 


SOUTH   AMERICA 


113 


IV.   SOUTH   AMERICA 


1.  South  America    as   a  Whole 

Surface.  —  South  America,  like 
North  America,  has  a  great  moun- 
tain system  in  the  west,  a  smaller 
highland  in  the  east,  and  a  great 
central  plain  between  the  eastern 
and  western  highlands.  The 
Andes  mountains  run  the  entire 
length  of  the  western  coast. 
This  is  one  of  the  highest  and 
longest  mountain  systems  in  the 
world.  Many  of  its  peaks  are 
always  covered  with  snow.  There 
are  many  volcanoes. 

The  vast  central  plain  covers 
about  five  sixths  of  the  continent. 
This  is  the  largest  plain  in  the 
world.  Three  great  rivers  drain 
this  plain.  What  are  they? 
(See  maps  on  pages  115  and  116.) 


A  scene  on  the  Amazon 

The  Amazon  is  the  largest 
river  in  the  world.  It  is  100 
miles  (160  kilometers)  wide  at 
the  mouth.  The  Amazon  flows 
through  a  forest-covered  valley. 


It  is  joined  by  many  smaller 
rivers.  The  Orinoco  river  has  a 
delta  larger  than  the  island  of 
Samar.  The  La  Plata  system 
drains  a  valley  as  large  as  the 
Mississippi  valley. 

Climate.  —  The  climate  of 
South  America  is  mainly  that  of 
the  torrid  zone.  In  the  south  the 
climate  is  temperate.  There  is 
plenty  of  rain  in  the  lowlands. 
On  the  Pacific  coast  there  are 
regions  where  it  is  very  dry. 

People  and  History.  —  Spain 
and  Portugal  conquered  most  of 
South  America  about  four  hun- 
dred years  ago.  -  Portugal  took 
Brazil.  The  natives  were  In- 
dians. Some  became  civilized, 
but  many  remained  savages. 

The  language  of  the  people  of 
the  towns  is  Spanish,  except  in 
Brazil,  where  it  is  Portuguese. 
The  white  people  are  nearly  all 
descendants  of  Spanish  or  Portu- 
guese settlers.  There  are  many 
mestizos.  Most  of  the  people 
are  Roman  Catholics. 

About  a  hundred  years  ago 
the  Spanish  South  American  colo- 
nies gained  their  independence. 
Later  Brazil  became  free  from 
Portugal.  All  of  the  countries 
of  South  America,  except  the 
Guianas,  are  republics. 


114 


PHILIPPINE   GEOGKAPHY   PRIMER 


South  America  is  rich  in  soil, 
mines,  and  forests.  Its  climate 
is  hot,  and  its  people  are  few. 
The  countries  are  republics. 

Helps.  —  Where  are  the  highlands 
in  South  America  ?  The  plain  ?  Tell 
about  the  Andes.  About  the  great 
plain.  The  Amazon.  The  Orinoco. 
The  La  Plata.  The  climate  of  South 
America.  What  nations  conquered 
South  America  ?  What  became  of  the 
Indians  ?  What  language  is  spoken 
in  most  of  the  towns  ?  In  the  towns  of 
Brazil?  What  peoples  live  in  South 
America  now  ?  What  form  of  gov- 
ernment have  the  countries  of  South 
America  ? 

South  America 

(See  map  on  page  115.) 

Map  Questions. — What  ocean  east 
of  South  America?  West?  What 
sea  north  ?  What  island  south  ?  What 
cape  at  the  south  end  of  this  island  ? 
What  strait  between  this  island  and 
the  mainland  ?  What  cape  at  the  ex- 
treme point  of  South  America  ? 

What  high  mountains  in  the  west- 
ern part  of  South  America?  What 
great  river  flows  east  through  the 
central  plain  of  South  America  ?  What 
river  flows  south  ?  North  ?  East  ? 

What  large  country  in  eastern 
South  America  ?  What  is  its  capital  ? 
Name  two  other  cities  in  Brazil.  What 
two  smaller  countries  south  of  Brazil  ? 
Name  their  capitals.  What  country 
is  in  southeastern  South  America? 
What  is  its  capital  ?  What  long 
country  west  of  the  Andes  ?  What  is 
its  capital  ?  Its  chief  seaport  ?  Name 
four  other  countries  in  western  South 
America  and  the  capital  of  each.  What 
countries  are  in  the  northern  part  of 
South  America  ?  Name  their  capitals. 


2.  The  Countries  of  South  America 
The  Northern  Countries  and  Brazil 

The  Republic  of  Panama  was 
formed  in  1904  under  the  pro- 
tection of  the  United  States. 
Through  the  Isthmus  of  Panama 
the  United  States  is  digging  a  ship 
canal  from  the  Atlantic  to  the  Pa- 
cific. This  will  be  the  most  im- 
portant canal  in  the  world.  What 
good  will  this  canal  do  the  Philip- 
pines? 

Venezuela  and  Guiana  are 
mountainous,  but  there  are  broad, 
grassy  plains  called  llanos  in  the 
valley  of  the  Orinoco.  Many 
cattle  are  raised.  Gold,  coffee, 
cacao,  and  sugar  are  the  chief 
exports.  Venezuela  is  a  republic, 
but  its  government  is  very  bad. 
Guiana  is  divided  into  three  colo- 
nies. What  are  they  ? 

Brazil.  —  This  is  the  largest 
and  most  important  country  of 
South  America.  Nearly  half  of 
the  land  and  people  of  South 
America  are  in  Brazil.  It  is 
larger  than  the  United  States 
without  Alaska.  In  the  great 
forests  of  the  Amazon  valley 
live  many  Indians  who  fish,  hunt, 
and  collect  rubber.  Most  of  the 
world's  rubber  comes  from  Brazil. 
Sugar,  cotton,  tobacco,  cassava 
(camoting-cajoy),  and  corn  are 
raised,  and  diamonds  are  taken 
from  the  mines. 


116 


PHILIPPINE   GEOGRAPHY   PHIMEK, 


SOUTH     AMERICA 


RELIEF  MAP  OF  SOUTH  AMERICA 

On  the   plains   of    the    south  Rio   de   Janeiro,  the    capital,  is 

many  cattle  and  horses  are  raised,  more  than  three  times  as  large 

On   the   eastern   highlands   half  as  Manila.    It  is  a  beautiful  city, 

the  coffee  of  the  world  is  grown,  with  a  magnificent  harbor. 


SOUTH   AMERICA 


117 


Brazil  produces   more  rubber 
and  coffee  than  any  other  country. 


'  The  harbor  at  Rio  Janeiro 

Helps.  —  What  is  the  United  States 
doing  in  Panama  ?  Describe  the  sur- 
face and  products  of  Venezuela  and 
Guiana.  What  are  the  three  colonies 
in  Guiana  ?  How  large  is  Brazil  ? 
Who  live  in  the  Amazon  valley  ? 
What  do  the  Indians  do  ?  Name  the 
agricultural  products.  What  kind  of 
mines  has  Brazil  ?  What  is  raised  on 
the  eastern  highland  ?  What  city  is 
the  capital  ?  What  is  said  of  it  ? 

Spell.  —  Isthmus,  canal,  protection, 
colonies,  cassava,  diamonds. 

The  La  Plata  Countries 

Paraguay  lies  in  the  basin  of 
the  Paraguay  river.  Of  what 
river  system  is  this  a  part  ?  (See 
map.)  It  is  one  of  the  two 
countries  of  South  America 
which  have  no  seacoast.  Which 
is  the  other?  Cattle  and  mate, 
a  kind  of  tea,  are  the  chief 
products. 

Uruguay  is  a  land  of  plains. 
Cattle  and  sheep  raising  are  the 
chief  occupations. 


Argentina  is  the  second  country 
of  South  America  in  importance. 
Its  climate  is  warm  and  rainy  in 
the  north,  and  dry  and  cool  in  the 
south.  Millions  of  cattle,  sheep, 
and  horses  graze  on  its  plains. 
The  exports  are  hides,  wool,  beef, 
and  wheat. 

There  are  many  Europeans  in 
Argentina.  The  government  is 
one  of  the  best  in  South  America. 
Buenos  Ayres  is  a  rich  city  of  a 
million  people.  It  is  the  largest 
city  of  South  America. 

The  La  Plata  countries  lie 
chiefly  in  the  great  basin  of  the 
La  Plata  river.  The  climate  is 
good.  Cattle,  sheep,  and  wheat 
are  raised.  Buenos  Ayres  is  a 
great  city. 


Cattle  in  Argentina 

Helps. — What  are  the  three  La  Plata 
countries  ?  What  are  the  products  of 
Paraguay  ?  Of  Uruguay  ?  How  im- 
portant is  Argentina  among  South 
American  countries  ?  Describe  the 
climate.  What  are  the  exports  ?  Who 
are  the  people  ?  What  is  said  of  the 
government  ?  Of  Buenos  Ayres  ? 


118 


PHILIPPINE   GEOGRAPHY  PRIMER 


Spell.  —  Paraguay,  Uruguay,  Bue- 
nos Ayres. 

The  Countries  of  the  Andes 

Chile  is  as  long  as  the  United 
States,  but  no  wider  than  north- 
ern Luzon.  In  the  north  it  is 
dry,  in  the  south  rainy.  Wheat, 
tobacco,  and  vegetables  are  raised, 
besides  cattle  and  sheep.  Chile 
has  great  mines  of  copper,  silver, 
and  gold.  Most  valuable  of  all 
its  exports  is  a  mineral  called 
nitrate  of  soda.  Great  quantities 
are  sent  to  Europe  to  put  upon 
soil  to  make  it  fertile. 


The  plaza  at  Valparaiso 

Santiago,  the  capital  and  largest 
city,  has  a  healthful  location  near 
the  mountains.  Valparaiso  is  the 
chief  port  on  the  Pacific  coast  of 
South  America.  In  1906,  a  few 
months  after  the  San  Francisco 
earthquake,  Valparaiso  was  al- 
most destroyed  by  an  earthquake 
and  by  fire.  Many  buildings  in 
Santiago  and  other  cities  of  Chile 


were  thrown  down  by  the  same 
earthquake. 

The  Tropical  Countries  of  the 
Andes  arePerw,  Bolivia,  Ecuador, 
and  Colombia.  These  four  coun- 
tries are  in  the  northern  part  of 
the  Andes  system.  They  are  much 
alike.  They  have  every  kind  of 
climate,  from  the  heat  of  the 
plains  on  the  coast,  to  the  cold  of 
the  Andes  mountains. 

Products. —  Cacao,  rubber,  and 
silver  are  the  chief  products  of 
Peru,  Bolivia  and  Ecuador.  The 
cacao  crop  of  Ecuador  is  the  larg- 
est in  the  world.  Western  Peru 
is  dry,  but  water  for  irrigation  is 
brought  from  the  mountains. 
Great  crops  of  sugar-cane,  coffee, 
cotton,  and  grapes  are  raised. 

In  Colombia  there  are  mines 
of  gold  and  silver.  Coffee  is  the 
main  export.  In  the  east  cattle 
are  raised.  Colombia  has  many 
re  volutions  and  a  bad  government. 

Cities.  —  Most  of  the  cities  of 
these  countries  are  built  in  the 
mountains.  This  is  so  that  they 
may  be  near  the  mines,  and  be- 
cause the  climate  is  better  in  the 
mountains,  and  also  because  there 
are  few  good  harbors  along  the 
coast  where  cities  can  be  built. 

Chile  is  rich  in  minerals.  Sil- 
ver, cacao,  coffee,  and  rubber  are 
exported  l)y  the  tropical  countries 
of  the  Andes. 


AFRICA 


119 


Helps. — What  country  of  South 
America  lies  west  of  the  southern 
Andes  ?  Describe  the  climate  of  Chile. 
Name  the  agricultural  products. 
The  products  of  the  mines.  What 
very  valuable  export  ?  What  city  is 
the  capital?  What  is  said  of  it? 
What  city  is  the  chief  port  of  Chile  ? 
What  happened  to  this  city  in  1906? 

Name  the  tropical  countries  of  the 
Andes  from  north  to  south.  Tell  about 
their  climate.  Which  three  are  much 
alike  in  products  ?  Name  the  products 
of  these  three  countries.  The  products 
of  Colombia.  Where  are  most  of  the 
cities  built  ?  Give  three  reasons  for  this. 

Spell.  —  Venezuela,   Guiana,  Rio  de 


Janeiro,  Buenos  Ayres,  Argentina,  Val- 
paraiso, Ecuador,  nitrate. 


Review  Questions  on  South  America. 
— Describe  the  surface  of  South  Amer- 
ica. Name  three  rivers.  Tell  about 
the  climate.  The  people.  Tell  some- 
thing of  the  history  of  South  America. 
What  kind  of  government  have  South 
American  countries  ?  Which  is  the 
largest  country  in  South  America  ? 
Which  country  grows  the  most  coffee  ? 
Eubber  ?  Cacao  ?  Name  the  largest 
city.  The  second  largest.  Begin  with 
Panama  and  name  all  the  coast  coun- 
tries of  South  America.  Which  coun- 
tries have  no  seacoast  ? 


V.     AFRICA 


1.  Africa  as  a  Whole 
Surface. — Africa  is  the  second 
of  the  continents  in  size.  Moun- 
tains run  along  most  of  the 
coasts  of  Africa.  The  interior 
is  mainly  drained  by  four  great 
rivers.  Name  them.  (See  map.) 
In  Northern  Africa  is  a  great 
hot  desert.  In  Central  Africa  is 
one  of  the  largest  forests  in  the 
world.  Wild  tribes  of  Negroes 
live  there  and  fierce  wild  animals 
like  the  lion,  leopard,  elephant, 
rhinoceros,  crocodile,  and  snake 

abound. 
Southern 
Africa  is 
mainly  a 
dry  pla- 
teau. A 
Leopard  range  of 


mountains  runs  along  the  coast. 

There  are 

rapids 

and  wa- 

terfalls in 

the    riv- 

ers.    This 


Rhinoceros 

difficult 

for  boats  to  go  up  the  streams. 
In  some  parts  of  Africa  the 
climate  is  very  unhealthful. 
There  are  many  diseases  which 
kill  men,  horses,  and  cattle. 

Because  of  all  these  things, 
traveling  in  Africa  is  very  diffi- 
cult. It  was  called  the  "dark 
continent"  because  so  little  was 
known  of  the  interior.  For  cen- 
turies the  desert,  the  forest,  the 
mountains,  the  hot  and  unhealth- 


120 


PHILIPPINE    GEOGRAPHY   PKIMER 


ful  climate,  and  the  wild  men  and 
wild  animals  kept  the  white  men 
from  traveling  thro  ugh  it.  There- 
fore, although  Africa  is  the  third 
of  the  continents  in  population, 
its  people  are  the  poorest  and 
most  ignorant  of  all. 

Climate.  —  No  other  continent 
has  so  much  of  its  surface  in  the 
torrid  zone  as  Africa.  Little  rain 
falls  in  the  north  and  the  south. 
The  climate  of  the  central  part  is 
hot  and  wet. 

Africa  is  a  large  continent. 
It  has  mountains,  forests,  deserts, 
and  fierce  wild  animals.  The 
climate  is  hot.  Most  of  the  peo- 
ple are  ignorant  Negroes. 

Helps.  —  How  large  is  Africa  ?  Why 
was  it  called  the  "  dark  continent  "  ? 
What  is  northern  Africa?  What  is 
in  central  Africa?  Describe  southern 
and  western  Africa.  What  five  things 

long  kept 
white  men 
from  travel- 
ing through 
Africa?  In 
which  zone 
is  most  of 
Africa? 
Tell  about 
the  climate. 

Spell.  —  Africa,  interior,  fierce. 
Africa 

(See  map  on  page  121.) 
Map  Questions. — What  ocean  is  west 
of  Africa?  East  ?  What  sea  is  north  ? 
Northeast?       What     continent     lies 


Crocodile 


north  of  Africa  ?  Northeast  ?  What 
island  east  of  Africa  ?  What  cape 
south  of  Africa  ?  West  ?  East  ? 
Name  four  African  rivers.  Four  Afri- 
can lakes.1  Name  the  countries  of 
northern  Africa  and  their  capitals. 
What  country  in  northeastern  Africa  ? 
Name  three  cities  of  Egypt. 
What  river  flows  through  Egypt  ? 
From  what  lakes  does  it  come? 
What  city  at  the  north  end  of  the 
Suez  Canal  ?  At  the  south  end  ? 
What  is  the  region  south  of  the  north 
African  countries  called.  What  region 
lies  south  of  the  Sahara?  What 
country  east  of  the  Sudan  ?  What 
country  is  south  of  the  Kongo  river  ? 
WThat  country  in  South  Africa  ?  What 
city  is  its  capital  ?  What  region 
lies  north  of  Cape  Colony  ?  Name 
some  cities  in  this  region.  What 
countries  have  possessions  in  Africa  ? 

2.     The  Countries  of  Africa 
The  Northern  Countries 

The  Barbary  States. — The  coun- 
tries along  the  Mediterranean 
coast  of  Africa,  except  Egypt,  are 
called  the  Barbary  States.  These 
countries  are  hilly  and  rocky  near 
the  coast  and  are  deserts  in  the 
interior.  The  climate  is  dry  and 
hot. 

The  people  belong  chiefly  to 
the  white  race.  They  are  mostly 
farmers  and  herders.  They  are 
Mahometan  in  religion. 

Morocco  is  a  kingdom.  Alge- 
ria and  Tunis  are  colonies  of 
France.  Tripoli  is  a  part  of  the 
Turkish  empire.  The  country 

1  Nyanza  is  the  African  word  for  lake. 


122 


PHILIPPINE   GEOGRAPHY   PRIMER- 


RELIEF  MAP  OF  AFRICA 


is  mostly  a  desert.  Caravans,1 
or  trains  of  loaded  camels,  from 
the  south  come  to  the  Barbary 
States  across  the  great  desert. 
They  bring  gold,  ivory,  and 
slaves. 

1  See  picture  on  page  124. 


Egypt.  —  Most  of  the  Egyp- 
tians live  on  the  banks  and  delta 
of  the  Nile  river.  The  rest  of 
Egypt  is  a  desert.  The  Nile 
overflows  its  banks  yearly,  and 
leaves  fertile  mud  on  the  fields. 
For  this  reason  the  soil  on  the 


AFRICA 


123 


banks  of  the  Nile  is  always  fer- 
tile. Great  crops  of  sugar-cane, 
wheat,  cotton,  and  rice  are  pro- 
duced. Many  camels  are  raised. 

The  pyramids  are  very  large 
and  famous  old  stone 
monuments.     They 
were    built    as    tombs 
for  the  kings  of  Egypt. 

Egypt  is  a  part  of 
the  Turkish  empire. 
Its  governor  is  called 
th  e  khedive.  The  real 
rulers  are  the  British. 
Cairo,  the  capital,  is  a 
large  and  famous  city. 
It  is  at  the  head  of  the 
Nile  delta.  Why  is 
that  a  good  place  to 
build  a  city?  Alexan- 
dria is  the  most  important  sea- 
port of  northern  Africa. 

The  Suez  canal,  in  Egypt, 
joins  the  Mediterranean  and  Red 
seas.  It  was  opened  in  1869, 
and  became  a  great  help  to  Phil- 
ippine commerce.  The  journey 
from  Spain  to  the  Philippines 
became  much  shorter. 

The  Barbary  States  are  hot 
and  dry.  The  flood  plain  and 
delta  of  the  Nile  river  are  very 
fertile,  and  have  a  large  popu- 
lation. 

Helps.  —  Name  the  Barbary  States. 
Describe  their  surface.  Their  climate. 
Tell  about  the  government  of  each. 
To  what  race  do  the  people  belong? 


What  is  their  religion?  What  goods 
come  across  the  desert  by  caravan? 
What  is  a  caravan  ? 

Where  do  most  of  the  Egyptians 
live  ?  What  makes  the  soil  of  Egypt 
rich  ?  What  are  the  chief  products  ? 


The  Nile  and  the  pyramids 

What  are  the  pyramids?  What  is 
the  ruler  called  ?  Of  what  empire  is 
Egypt,  a  part  ?  What  country  really 
rules  Egypt  ?  Name  the  chief  cities. 
Where  and  of  what  value  is  the  Suez 
canal  ? 

Spell. — Barbary,  Morocco,  Algeria, 
Tunis,  Tripoli,  caravan,  Egypt,  Nile, 
pyramids. 


A  water  carrier  in  Morocco 


124 


PHILIPPINE   GEOGRAPHY   PRIMER 


Other  Countries  of  Africa 

The  Sahara  lies  south  of  the 
Barbary  States.  It  is  the  largest 
desert  in  the  world.  A  few  wild 
tribes  live  on  the  borders  of  this 
desert. 


A  caravan  in  the  desert 

The  Sudan  is  a  grassy  plain 
south  of  the  Sahara.  The  peo- 
ple are  Negroes.  France  and 
Great  Britain  own  most  of  the 
Sudan.  To  what  countries  do 
caravans  go  from  the  Sudan  ? 

Abyssinia  is  a  plateau  in  east- 
ern Africa.  The  people  are 
whites  and  Negroes.  Coffee,  gold, 
ivory,  and  wax  are  exported. 

The  Kongo  Free  State  is  chiefly 
a  dense  forest.  Rubber  is  the 
most  valuable  product.  Many 
millions  of  Negroes  live  in  this 
country.  They  are  very  igno- 
rant. The  Kongo  Free  State  is 
ruled  by  the  king  of  Belgium. 

West  Coast  Countries.  —  There 
are  many  small  countries  on  the 
west  coast.  Negroes  live  in 


them.  These  countries  are  colo- 
nies of  different  European  na- 
tions. They  are  hot  and 
unhealthf ul  near  the  sea. 

South  Africa.  -  -  The  interior  is 
a  highland.  The  coast  is  low 
and  forest-c  o  v  e  r  e  d. 
The  main  industry  is 
cattle  and  sheep  rais- 
ing. There  are  very 
rich  gold  mines  near 
Johannesburg.  At 
Kimberley  are  the 
greatest  diamond 
mines  in  the  world. 
Cape  Town  is  a  noted  seaport. 

Nearly  all  of  South  Africa  be- 
longs to  England.  The  east 
coast  belongs  mainly  to  Portu- 
gal and  Germany. 

Madagascar  is  the  fourth  larg- 
est island  of  the  world.  Ne- 
groes live  on  the  west  coast,  and 
people  like  the  Malayans  in  race 
on  the  east  coast.  Gold  and 
rubber  are  exported. 


A  mission  school  in  central  Africa 


AUSTRALIA   AND   THE   PACIFIC   ISLANDS 


125 


Helps.  —  Tell  about  the  Sahara. 
The  Sudan.  Abyssinia.  What  covers 
the  surface  of  the  Kongo  Free  State  ? 
What  is  the  chief  product  ?  Who 
are  the  people  ?  By  whom  are  they 
governed  ?  Tell  about  the  west  coast 
countries.  What  country  owns  most 
of  South 
Africa? 
Describe 
the  sur- 
face. 
W  h  a  t 
mines  are 
in  South 
Africa? 
Name  the  chief  cities.  What  coun- 


Giraffe 


tries  own  most  of  the  east  coast?     Tell 
about  Madagascar. 

Spell.  —  Sahara,  ivory,  plateau,  Kim- 
berley. 

Review  Questions  on  Africa. — Com- 
pare Africa  in  size  and  population 
with  the  other  continents.  Where  is 
the  great  desert?  The  great  forest? 
The  plateau  ?  Name  the  four  great 
rivers  of  Africa.  Give  five  reasons 
why  the  white  people  were  slow  to 
explore  Africa.  Who  are  the  peoples 
of  Africa  ?  What  kind  of  government 
have  most  of  the  countries  ?  Where 
in  Africa  are  there  great  gold  and 
diamond  mines? 


VI.     AUSTRALIA   AND    THE    PACIFIC    ISLANDS 


Australia  is  the  smallest  of  the 
continents  in  both  size  and  popu- 
lation. It  is  the  only  continent 
which  lies  entirely  south  of  the 
equator.  The  surface  is  mainly 
a  low  plateau,  with  mountains 
in  the  east.  There  are  few  riv- 
ers. Many  of  the  lakes  are  salt. 
The  climate  of  most  of  Australia 
is  dry,  and  very  hot  in  the  sum- 
mer. 

There  are  many  strange  ani- 
mals and  plants  in  Australia. 
Some  of  the  plants  have  no 

leaves. 
The  kan- 
g  a  r  o  o 
and  some 
other 
Austra- 

Kangaroo  with  young  h"an     am> 


mals    carry    their    young    in    a 
pocket   in  the  skin. 

Millions  of  sheep  and  many 
cattle  are  raised  in  Australia. 
Much  of  the  meat  eaten  in 
Manila  comes  from  Australia. 
Horses,  cattle,  lumber,  and  coal 
are  also  exported  to  Manila. 
Wool,  gold,  and  meats  are  sent 
to  Europe. 

The  na- 
tives of  Aus- 
tralia are 
Negroes. 
They  are 
among  the 
lowest  sav- 
a  g  e  s  on 
earth.  Most 
of  the  people 

belong  tO  the         An  Australian  savage 


126 


PHILIPPINE    GEOGKAPHY   PRIMER 


white  race.  Nearly  all  of  them 
are  of  British  descent.  Australia 
is  a  part  of  the  British  empire. 
It  is  a, commonwealth  of  five  states. 
Like  Canada,  Australia  has  much 
self-government.  It  is  a  prosper- 
ous country.  Melbourne  and  Syd- 
ney are  great  cities. 


A  street  in  Sydney 

New  Zealand  is  a  group  of 
mountainous  islands  southeast  of 
Australia.  The  climate  is  cool 
and  equable.  There  are  many 
forests.  The  soil  is  rich.  Gold, 
wool,  and  meat  are  the  chief 
exports.  There  are  a  few  native 
Malayans,  but  most  of  the  peo- 
ple are  white.  New  Zealand  is 
a  self-governing  colony  of  the 
British  empire. 

New  Guinea  is  one  of  the 
largest  islands  in  the  world.  The 
people  are  wild  and  fierce  Ne- 
groes. To  what  three  countries 
does  New  Guinea  belong  ? 

Smaller  Pacific  Islands. — There 
are  many  other  islands  in  the 


Pacific  ocean.  Most  of  them 
are  the  tops  of  old  volcanoes 
that  have  come  up  above  the 
sea.  The  people  of  these  islands 
are  mainly  Malayan  in  race. 
They  are  not  highly  civilized. 
They  are  ruled  by  different 
nations  of  Europe  and  by  the 
United  States.  The  people  live 
by  farming  and  fishing.  Copra 
is  the  main  export  of  most  of  the 
islands. 

Australia  is  the  smallest  conti- 
nent. The  climate  is  dry.  Wool, 
meats,  and  gold  are  exported. 
New  Zealand  is  a  prosperous 
colony  of  Great  Britain.  The 
people  of  the  small  Pacific  islands 
are  Malayans. 

Helps. —  How  does  Australia  com- 
pare in  size  and  population  with  the 
other  continents?  Describe  the  sur- 
face. The  climate.  Animals.  Plants. 
What  are  the  exports  of  Australia  to 
Manila?  The  exports  to  Europe  ? 
Who  are  the  natives  of  Australia? 
Of  what  race  are  most  of  the  people  ? 
Tell  about  the  government.  What 
are  the  chief  cities  ? 

Where  is  New  Zealand?  Describe 
the  surface.  The  climate.  What  are 
the  products  ?  What  kind  of  govern- 
ment has  New  Zealand?  What  is 
said  of  New  Guinea  ? 

How  were  most  of  the  smaller  Pa- 
cific islands  made?  Who  are  the 
people?  How  are  they  governed? 
How  do  they  live?  What  is  the 
chief  export? 

Spell. — Australia,  Melbourne,  Syd- 
ney, New  Zealand,  kangaroo. 


-"l^ii^oi 


APPENDIX 

SIZE  AND  POPULATION  OF  THE  EARTH,   CONTINENTS,   AND 

COUNTRIES 


Length  of  the  Earth's  Axis 
Length  of  the  Earth's  Equator 

Area  of  the  Earth's  Surface 
Area  of  the  Ocean 


SQUARE    MILES 

Asia  (with  islands)      

17,056,000 

Europe         

3,842,000 

Africa          .         .         

11,512,000 

North  America    ....... 

9,430,000 

South  America    

6,856,000 

Australia  (with  islands)       

3,456,000 

Antarctic  Lands           ...... 

254,000 

THE  PHILIPPINES        

114,410 

THE  UNITED  STATES  (with  possessions)     . 

3,806,279 

The  East  Indies  (with  Philippines)     . 

787,302 

The  Chinese  Empire    .         .         .         . 

4,300,900 

British  Indian  Empire         

1,917,621 

The  Japanese  Empire          

161,135 

Mexico         

767,258 

Cuba    .                                          . 

44,015 

Brazil           

3,300,816 

Argentina    

1,083,551 

The  British  Isles          

121,367 

The  German  Empire  (in  Europe) 

210,232 

France         

207,217 

Spain            . 

191,986 

The  Russian  Empire   

8,785,187 

7,900 
24,902 

SQUARE   MILES 

196,940,000 
144,500,000 

POPULATION 

1,600,000,OOC 

906,674,000 

396,406,000 

140,274,000 

105,806,000 

38,482,000 

6,458,000 

7,636,000 
84,907,156 

43,237,000 
426,047,000 
300,164,000 

46,495,000 

13,606,000 
1,573,000 

14,334,000 
4,957,000 

41,608,000 
56,367,000 
38,962,000 
18,235,000 
130,941,000 


THE  TWELVE  LARGEST   CITIES  OF   THE  WORLD 


London  (England) 

New  York    . 

Paris    . 

Berlin 

Tokio 

Chicago 


POPULATION 

4,649,000 
3,437,202 
2,714,000 
1,889,000 
1,819,000 
1,698,575 


Vienna 

Canton 

St.  Petersburg 

Philadelphia 

Constantinople 

Calcutta 


POPULATION 

1,675,000 
1,600,000 
1,313,000 
1,293,000 
1,203,000 
1,121,664 


THE  FIVE  LONGEST   RIVERS 


Mississippi-Missouri 
Nile      .         .         . 
Amazon 


4,200 
3,700 
3,300 


Yangtze 
Kongo  . 


128 


3,000 
2,900 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


UNITED  STATES 

AND  ITS  POSSESSIONS 


SOTE:  The  maps  of  Hawaii,  Samoa,  Guam  and 
Wake  Is.  same  scale  aa  map  of  Philippine  Islands. 


Longitude    West  85  from    Greenwi 


